G7167 G5668 G7137 Multisampler SerMa en SD 29000237

Multisamplers
Agilent InfinityLab LC Series

Service Manual
InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual

Notices
Document Information Warranty Safety Notices
Document No: SD-29000237 Rev. D The material contained in this document
EDITION 11/2020 is provided “as is,” and is subject to being C AU T I O N
changed, without notice, in future edi-
A CAUTION notice denotes a
Copyright tions. Further, to the maximum extent
permitted by applicable law, Agilent dis- hazard. It calls attention to an
© Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2015-2020 claims all warranties, either express or operating procedure, practice, or
No part of this manual may be repro- implied, with regard to this manual and the like that, if not correctly per-
duced in any form or by any means any information contained herein, includ- formed or adhered to, could result
(including electronic storage and retrieval ing but not limited to the implied warran- in damage to the product or loss
or translation into a foreign language) ties of merchantability and fitness for a
of important data. Do not proceed
without prior agreement and written con- particular purpose. Agilent shall not be lia-
sent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as ble for errors or for incidental or conse- beyond a CAUTION notice until
governed by United States and interna- quential damages in connection with the the indicated conditions are fully
tional copyright laws. furnishing, use, or performance of this understood and met.
document or of any information con-
Agilent Technologies
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse 8
tained herein. Should Agilent and the user WAR N IN G
have a separate written agreement with
76337 Waldbronn
warranty terms covering the material in A WARNING notice denotes a
this document that conflict with these hazard. It calls attention to an
terms, the warranty terms in the separate operating procedure, practice, or
agreement shall control.
the like that, if not correctly per-
Technology Licenses formed or adhered to, could
result in personal injury or death.
The hardware and/or software described Do not proceed beyond a WARN-
in this document are furnished under a
ING notice until the indicated
license and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of such conditions are fully understood
license. and met.
Restricted Rights Legend

U.S. Government Restricted Rights. Soft-
ware and technical data rights granted to
the federal government include only
those rights customarily provided to end
user customers. Agilent provides this
customary commercial license in Soft-
ware and technical data pursuant to FAR
12.211 (Technical Data) and 12.212
(Computer Software) and, for the Depart-
ment of Defense, DFARS 252.227-7015
(Technical Data - Commercial Items) and
DFARS 227.7202-3 (Rights in Commer-
cial Computer Software or Computer
Software Documentation).
InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual

In This Guide
This manual covers the following InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers:

• Agilent 1290 Infinity II Multisampler (G7167B),
• Agilent 1260 Infinity II Multisampler (G7167A),
• Agilent 1290 Infinity II Bio Multisampler (G7137A), and
• Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-Inert Multisampler (G5668A)
1 Introduction
This chapter gives an introduction to the Multisampler.
2 Site Requirements and Specifications

This chapter provides information on environmental requirements, physical and
performance specifications.
3 Installation
This chapter gives information about the preferred stack setup for your system
and the installation of your module.
4 Using the Module

This chapter explains the essential operational parameters of the module.
5 Preparing the Module

This chapter explains the operational parameters of the module.
6 Optimizing Performance
This chapter gives hints on how to optimize the performance or use additional
devices.
7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

This chapter gives an overview about the troubleshooting and diagnostic features
and the different user interfaces.
InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 3

8 Error Information
This chapter describes the meaning of error messages, and provides information
on probable causes and suggested actions how to recover from error conditions.
9 Test Functions and Calibration

This chapter describes the built in test functions.
10 Maintenance and Repair

This chapter describes the maintenance and repair of the Multisampler.
11 Parts for Maintenance and Upgrade or Options

This chapter provides information on parts material required for the module.
12 Identifying Cables
This chapter provides information on cables used with the modules.
13 Hardware Information
This chapter describes the module in more detail on hardware and electronics.
14 LAN Configuration
This chapter provides information on connecting the detector to the Agilent
ChemStation PC.
15 Appendix
This chapter provides addition information on safety, legal and web.

Contents
1 Introduction 12
Product Description (G7167B) 13
Features (G7167B) 14
Product Description (G7167A) 15
Features (G7167A) 16
Overview of the Module 21
Standard Single Needle Setup 23
Injection Sequences 24
System Overview 33
2 Site Requirements and Specifications 41

Site Requirements 42
Physical Specifications 46
Performance Specifications 50
Specifications of the Sample Cooler 58
Specifications of the Sample Thermostat 60
3 Installation 62
Unpacking the Module 63
Optimizing the Stack Configuration 65
Install the Module 69
Flow Connections to the Multisampler 73

4 Using the Module 78
Magnets 79
Turn on/off 80
Status indicators 82
Drawer Status Indicator 83
Insert vial trays/wellplates 84
Remove vial trays/wellplates 85
Installing the Optional Sample Cooler/Thermostat 86
Using the Optional Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 94
Transporting the Sampler 104
Solvent Information 109
Reset the Multisampler in Case of an Error 120
Agilent Local Control Modules 123
5 Preparing the Module 124

Leak and Waste Handling 125
Preparing the Multisampler 126
Recommended Mats and Vials 127
Configure Well Plate Types 130
Capillary Coding Guide 133
Installing Capillaries 135
Flow Connections to the Washport (Standard) 139
Flow Connections to the Washport (Dual-Needle) 141
Installing the Bypass Capillary (Dual Needle) 143
Flow Connections to the Washport (Multiwash) 146
Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab CDS ChemStation
Edition 148
Setting up the Dual Needle System with Agilent OpenLAB CDS ChemStation
Edition 155

6 Optimizing Performance 169
Delay Volume and Extra-Column Volume 170
How to Configure the Optimum Delay Volume 171
How to Achieve Higher Injection Volumes 175
How to Achieve High Throughput 177
How to Achieve Higher Resolution 178
How to Achieve Higher Sensitivity 181
How to Achieve Lowest Carry Over 182
7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 184

User Interfaces 185
Agilent Lab Advisor Software 186
8 Error Information 187

What Are Error Messages 189
General Error Messages 190
Sampler Error Messages 198
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Error Messages 211
9 Test Functions and Calibration 224

Introduction 225
System Pressure Test 226
Auto Referencing 229
Maintenance Positions 231
Injector Steps 235
Sample Cooler Function Test 237
Sample Handler Function Test 238
Sampler Leak Test 239

10 Maintenance and Repair 240
Introduction to Maintenance 242
Warnings and Cautions 244
Overview of Maintenance 247
Clean the Module 248
Removal and Installation of the Front Door 249
Remove the Needle Assembly 252
Install the Needle Assembly 257
Exchange the Needle Seat 261
Replace the Rotor Seal 264
Replace the Injection Valve 270
Remove the Metering Seal 275
Install the Metering Seal 280
Replace the Peristaltic Pump Cartridge 286
Replace the Flushhead Seal 289
Remove the Sample Loop-Flex 293
Installing the Sample Loop-Flex 297
Replace the Dummy Drawer 301
Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 309
Introduction to Repair 314
Replace Analytical Heads/Metering Device 315
Exchange the Mainboard Fuses 320
Assemble the Main Cover 322
Remove the Main Cover and Top Plates 323
Install the Top Plates and Main Cover 325
Remove and Reinstall the Sample Handler 327
Checking the Belt Tension 331
Replace the Sample Hotel 333
Replace the Hydraulic Box 336
Disassemble and Reassemble Inner Parts of the Hydraulic Box 339
Disassemble and Reassemble the Electronical Box 342
Replace the Fusion Board 348
Replace the Needle Port Assembly 349
Add Needle Port Assembly 353
Replace the Power Switch 357

Disassemble and Reassemble the Door Mechanism 359
Replace the Module Firmware 362
Changing the Type and Serial Number 363
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Repair 368
11 Parts for Maintenance and Upgrade or Options 399

Standard Parts 401
Hotel Assembly 404
Hotel Drawer 406
Sample Handler Assembly 407
Analytical Head Assembly 40 µL 408
Bio-Compatible Analytical Head Assembly 40 µL 409
Bio-inert Analytical Head Assembly (100 µL) (600 bar) 412
Flush Head Assembly 500 µL 415
Bio Flush Head Assembly 500 µl 417
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI 419
Bio-Compatible 2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI 421
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve IDEX 422
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve Bio-inert IDEX 423
Injection Valve with Actuator 425
Sample Loops and Capillaries (Dual Needle) 426
3-Position/6-Port Peripheral Valve Dual Needle 428
2-Position/8-Port Injection Valve Dual Needle 429
Sheet Metal Kit 430
Cabinet Kit 431
Needle Port Assembly 432
Door Assy 433
Electronic Box 434
Power Switch Assy 436
Hydraulic Box (Standard) 437
Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Standard) 439
Bio Hydraulic Box (1300 bar) 441
Hydraulic Box (Multiwash) 443

Bio and Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Multiwash) 445
Hydraulic Box (Dual Needle) 447
Valve Box Multiwash 449
Accessory Kit 450
Bottles 452
Tubing Kit Sampler Standard 453
Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Multi-Wash 455
Multi Draw Kits 456
Bio-Inert Multi-Draw Kit 457
Upgrade Kits 458
Leak System Parts 459
Sample Thermostat 460
Service Parts for Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 461
12 Identifying Cables 462

Cable Overview 463
Analog Cables 465
Remote Cables 467
CAN/LAN Cables 471
Agilent Module to PC 472
USB 473
13 Hardware Information 474

Firmware Description 475
Power Supply 478
Electrical Connections 480
Interfaces 483
Main Board 491
Setting the 6-bit Configuration Switch 494
Instrument Layout 496
Early Maintenance Feedback 497

In This Guide
14 LAN Configuration 498

Setting up the module in a LAN environment 499
15 Appendix 500
General Safety Information 501
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 507
Refrigerant 508
Radio Interference 511
Sound Emission Certification for Federal Republic of Germany 512
Installation of Stainless Steel Cladded PEEK Capillaries 514
Agilent Technologies on Internet 520

1 Introduction
Product Description (G7167B) 13

Features (G7167B) 14
Overview of the Module 21
Standard Single Needle Setup 23
Injection Sequences 24
System Overview 33
Leak and Waste Handling in a Mixed Configuration 39
This chapter gives an introduction to the Multisampler.

1 Introduction
Product Description (G7167B)
Product Description (G7167B)
The Agilent 1290 Infinity II Multisampler can handle both vials and microtiter
plates with ease and efficiency up to 1300 bar system pressure, optimized on
chromatographic performance.
In fact, this compact module has the capacity to house up to 6144 samples, all
inside the Agilent stack footprint and the robotics to smoothly inject each into the
chromatograph in turn.
With the multi-wash capability, you can reduce carryover to less than 9 parts per
million.
Status indicator
Needle assembly
Hotel drawer
Leak drain
Power switch
Figure 1 Overview of the Multisampler

1 Introduction
Features (G7167B)
Features (G7167B)
• Unmatched flexibility – You choose how you want to introduce samples for
injection, whether you prefer vials, microtiter plates, or any combination of
formats. Sample drawers are available in three heights, and you can mix
shallow drawers with deeper ones to accommodate different sample sizes.
• High capacity – Using shallow well-plate drawers, the 1290 Infinity II
Multisampler takes a maximum load of 16 microtiter plates and up to 6144
samples—the most of any single system.
• Seamless automation – Internal robotics move microtiter plates and other
sample containers from the sample hotel to the central workspace for sample
processing steps and injections.
• Dual-needle injection – By running samples alternately through one or the
other injection path, you can reduce cycle times to mere seconds, virtually
eliminating conventional wait times—whether for large volume loadings or
flushing procedures.
• Scalable injection volumes – The Agilent unique dual-needle setup also
enhances flexibility by providing two differently optimized injectors in a single
instrument. You can, for example, optimize one path for large volume
injections and the other for low delay volumes.
• Ultralow carryover – The 1290 Infinity II Multisampler is designed for low
carryover, but you can take clean to a whole new level with our multi-wash
capability, cleaning all relevant injection parts between runs. This
sophisticated, integrated feature flushes the injection needle outside with
three solvents, and uses seat backflush procedures to reduce carryover to
less than 9 ppm.
• Integrated sample thermostat – available as option or upgrade, providing
cooling and heating in the range from 4 °C - 40 °C.
• Instant information – Lights on each drawer tell you all you need to know
about loading status, current activity, and accessibility.

1 Introduction
Product Description (G7167A)
The Agilent 1260 Infinity II Multisampler can handle both vials and microtiter
plates with ease and efficiency up to 800 bar system pressure, optimized on high
flexibility.
This compact module can house up to 6144 samples, all inside the Agilent stack
footprint and the robotics to inject each into the chromatograph in turn.
With the multi-wash capability, you can reduce carryover to less than 9 parts per
million.
Status indicator
Needle assembly
Hotel drawer
Leak drain
Power switch

1 Introduction
Features (G7167A)
Features (G7167A)
• Unmatched flexibility – You can choose how you want to introduce samples
for injection, whether you prefer vials, microtiter plates, or any combination of
shallow drawers with deeper ones to accommodate different sample sizes.
• High capacity – Using shallow well-plate drawers, the 1260 Infinity II
samples—the most of any single system.
• Seamless automation – Internal robotics move microtiter plates and other
• Dual-needle injection – By running samples alternately through one or the
other injection path, you can reduce cycle times to mere seconds, virtually
eliminating conventional wait times—whether for large volume loadings or
flushing procedures.
• Scalable injection volumes – The Agilent dual-needle setup enhances flexibility
by providing two differently optimized injectors in a single instrument. You
can, for example, optimize one path for large volume injections and the other
for low delay volumes.
• Ultralow carryover – The 1260 Infinity II Multisampler has a low carryover, and
a multi-wash capability, cleaning all relevant injection parts between runs.
This integrated feature flushes the injection needle outside with three
solvents, and uses seat backflush procedures to reduce carryover to less than
9 ppm.
• Efficient temperature control – For temperature-sensitive samples, add
Agilent’s compressor-based cooling system. It maintains temperature control
on all vials and plates inserted into the 1260 Infinity II Multisampler.
• Instant information – Lights on each drawer tell you about loading status,
current activity, and accessibility.

1 Introduction
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-Inert Multisampler features a 100 % metal-free sample

flow path and is therefore the ideal injector for all biorelated applications,
including analysis of mAbs, proteins in general and oligonucleotides. The
ceramic needle, PEEK needle seat, and stainless steel-clad PEEK capillaries
ensure highest injection accuracy and precision and are rated for a maximum
system pressure of 600 bar allowing the use of highest performance columns.
With multiwash capability, you can reduce carryover to less than 9 ppm. This
design offers highest flexibility by handling both vials and microtiter plates and
can house up to 6144 samples. For temperature-sensitive samples, simply add
Agilent’s highly efficient compressor-based cooling system. It allows you to
maintain perfect temperature control on all vials and plates inserted.
Status indicator
Needle assembly
Hotel drawer
Leak drain
Power switch
Figure 3 Overview of the Bio-inert Multisampler

1 Introduction
Features (G5668A)
Features (G5668A)
• Reliable analysis of biological samples – the metal-free sample flow path at

600 bar means that none of your precious sample touches metal surfaces.
• Maintain perfect temperature control - for temperature-sensitive samples,
simply add Agilent’s new highly efficient compressor-based cooling system. It
allows you to efficiently control the temperature of all vials and plates inserted
into the 1260 Infinity II Multisampler.
• Ultralow carryover - the 1260 Infinity II Multisampler is designed for low
carryover. But you can take clean to a whole new level with our multiwash
capability, cleansing all relevant injection parts between runs. This
sophisticated, integrated feature flushes the injection needle outside with
three solvents, and uses seat backflush procedures to reduce carryover to
less than 9 ppm.
• Unmatched flexibility - you choose how you want to introduce samples for
injection, whether you prefer vials, microtiter plates, or any combination of
shallow drawers with deeper ones to accommodate different sample sizes
• High capacity - using shallow well-plate drawers, the 1260 Infinity II
samples. The most of any single system.
• Seamless automation - internal robotics move microtiter plates and other

1 Introduction
The 1290 Infinity II Bio Multisampler, with its biocompatible sample flow path, is
perfectly suited for biomolecule analysis, such as critical quality attributes
(CQAs), ensuring integrity of biomolecules and minimizing unwanted surface
interaction. It is a multipurpose autosampler that handles vials and microplates,
and is optimized for highest chromatographic performance.
Injecting at pressures up to 1300 bar, the Bio Multisampler is a compact module
with a capacity of up to 6144 samples, all within the footprint of an Agilent LC
stack. For temperature-sensitive samples, a highly efficient compressor-based
thermostatting device can be added.
Status indicator
Needle assembly
Hotel drawer
Leak drain
Power switch

1 Introduction
Features (G7137A)
Features (G7137A)
• Biocompatible sample flow path ensures integrity of biomolecules and

minimize unwanted surface interaction.
• Integrated sample thermostat, available as option or upgrade, provides
cooling and heating from 4 to 40 °C, preventing degradation of
temperature-sensitive samples, or allowing samples to be handled under
certain temperature conditions.
• Sample drawers are available in three heights to accommodate any
combination of sample containers for maximum flexibility.
• Shallow microplate drawers take a maximum load of 6144 samples for
unmatched sample capacity.
• Optional Multiwash capability flushes the outside surface of the injection
needle and uses seat backflush procedures to reduce carryover to less than
9 ppm.
• Robotics move microtiter plates and other sample containers from sample
hotel to central workspace for seamless automation during sample

1 Introduction
Overview of the Module
The Multisampler transport mechanism uses a Cartesian robot. The X-Y drive
together with the Z drive optimize the grabbing and positioning for the sample
trays and the needle handling inside of the Multisampler. The sample coupler
moves the sample container from the sample hotel which stores all the samples
and place it on the central workspace. Then the needle coupler of the Z drive
takes over and grabs the needle assembly from the needle station and performs
the analytical procedures inside of the Multisampler. Due the uncoupled needle
design, the robot can do other liquid handling jobs during the analysis.
The multisampler employs an active vial/plate pusher mechanism to hold down
the vial or the plate while the needle is drawn back from the sample vessel (a
must in the case a septum is used). This active vial/plate pusher employs a
sensor to detect the presence of a plate and to ensure accurate movement
regardless of plate used. All axes of the transport mechanism are driven by very
fast BLCD motors. Optical encoders ensure the correct operation of the
movement.
The standard configuration of the Multisampler uses either a 40 µL or a 100 µL
metering device. With this instrument setup, it is possible to inject a maximum
volume of 20 µL or 100 µL. For higher injection volumes, additional hardware
modifications are required. For minimum internal carryover, the entire injection
flowpath is always flushed by the mobile phase.
In addition, you have two different possibilities to reduce the carryover. The first
is the external needle wash. In the Standard configuration, the needle flush
station is equipped with a peristaltic pump to wash the outside of the needle.
This reduces already low carryover for very sensitive analysis. The bottle
containing the mobile phase for the wash procedure will be located in the solvent
bottle cabinet. Produced waste during this operation is channeled safely away
through a waste drain. In the Multi-Wash configuration, the external needle wash
will be done by a micro piezo pump combined with a solvent selection valve,
where you can select between three different solvents. If this is not sufficient to
reduce the carryover, there is an additional and perfect way to achieve the lowest
carryover in the Multi-Wash configuration by using the integrated flush pump.
This high-pressure pump can also select between three different solvents and is
capable of reducing the carryover to a minimum by using the seat backflushing.
The flush pump outlet capillary is connected to port 4 of the Multisampler's
injection valve, which normally holds the waste line. If the Multisampler is in
bypass mode, the flush pump connects to the needle seat and can flush

1 Introduction
backwards through the needle seat into the waste line attached to the needle
seat outlet port.
The six-port (only 5 ports are used) injection valve unit is driven by a high-speed
hybrid stepper motor. During the sampling sequence, the valve unit bypasses the
Multisampler, and connects flow from the pump to the column directly. During
injection and analysis, the valve unit directs the flow through the Multisampler
which ensures that all of the sample is injected onto the column, and that the
metering unit and needle are always free of sample residue before the next
sampling sequence begins.
The Cooling Control of the vial/plate temperature in the Multisampler is achieved
using an additional Agilent Sample Cooler or Sample Thermostat module. The
chiller unit is a micro compressor-based refrigerator. A fan draws air from the
central workstation above the sample container of the Multisampler. It is then
blown through the fins of the cooling module, where it is cooled according to the
temperature setting. The cooled air enters the Sampler Hotel through a recess
underneath the special designed base plate. The air is then distributed evenly
through the Sample Hotel ensuring effective temperature control, regardless of
how many sample containers are in the drawer. In cooling mode, condensation is
generated on the cooled side of the Sample Cooler or Sample Thermostat. This
condensed water is safely guided into a waste bottle for condensed water that is
located underneath the working bench.

1 Introduction
Standard Single Needle Setup
Standard Single Needle Setup
The movements of the Multisampler components during the sampling sequence are
monitored continuously by the Multisampler processor. The processor defines
specific time windows and mechanical ranges for each movement. If a specific step
of the sampling sequence is not completed successfully, an error message is
generated. Solvent is bypassed from the Multisampler by the injection valve during
the sampling sequence. After the required sample container was automatically
loaded from the sample hotel and placed on the central workspace. The Needle
assembly moves via robot to the desired sample position and is lowered into the
sample liquid in the sample to allow the metering device to draw up the desired
volume by moving its plunger back a certain distance. The needle assembly is then
raised again and moved to the needle park station onto the seat to close the sample
loop. Sample is applied to the column when the injection valve returns to the
mainpass (main path) position at the end of the sampling sequence.
The standard sampling sequence occurs in the following order:
1 The robot loads the required sample container on the central workspace
2 The injection valve switches to the bypass position.
3 The plunger of the metering device moves to the initialization position.
4 The robot couples into the needle assembly from the needle parkstation.
5 The robot unlocks the needle assembly and moves up.
6 The coupled needle assembly/robot moves to the desired sample vial (or well
plate) position on the central workstation.
7 The needle lowers into the sample vial (or well plate).
8 The metering device draws the preset sample volume.
9 The needle lifts out of the sample vial (or well plate).
10 The coupled needle assembly/robot is then moved to the park station onto the
seat to close the sample loop.
11 The needle assembly is locked into the park station and moves down.
12 The injection cycle is completed when the injection valve switches to the
mainpass (main path) position.
13 The robot moves the sample container back into the sample hotel if the sampling
sequence is done. If needle wash is required it will be done between step 9 and 10.
For the needle seat backflush the Multisampler must be in bypass mode.
NOTE
If an additional needle seat backflush is required this step must also be done
between step 5 and 9.

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Injection Sequences
Injection Sequence for single needle

Before the start of the injection sequence, and during an analysis, the injection
valve is in the mainpass (main path) position. In this position, the mobile phase
flows through the Multisampler metering device, sample loop, and needle,
ensuring all parts in contact with sample are flushed during the run, thus
minimizing carryover.
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 5 Valve in mainpass (main path), flow through
When the sample sequence begins, the valve unit switches to the bypass
position. Solvent from the pump enters the valve unit at port 1, and flows directly
to the column through port 6.

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
The standard injection starts with draw sample from vial/wellplate from the
central workstation. In order to do this the needle assembly moves via robot to
the desired sample position and is lowered into the sample liquid in the sample to
allow the metering device to draw up the desired volume by moving its plunger
back a certain distance. The needle assembly is then raised again and moved to
the needle park station onto the seat to close the sample loop. In case of an
injector program several steps are interspersed at this point.
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 6 Valve in bypass, drawing sample

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Flush the Needle

Before injection and to reduce the carryover for very sensitive analysis, the
outside of the needle can be washed in a flush port located behind the injector
port. As soon as the needle is on the flush port a wash pump delivers some
solvent during a defined time to clean the outside of the needle. At the end of this
process the needle assembly returns to the needle port.
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 7 Valve in bypass, washing needle

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Inject-and-Run
The final step is the inject- and run-step. The six-port valve is switched to the
mainpass (main path) position, and directs the flow back through the sample
loop, which now contains a certain amount of sample. The solvent flow
transports the sample onto the column, and separation begins. This is the
beginning of a run within an analysis. In this stage, all major
performance-influencing hardware is flushed internally by the solvent flow. For
standard applications no additional flushing procedure is required.
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 8 Valve in mainpass (main path), sample injected

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Needle seat back flush

After the injection to reduce the carryover for very sensitive analysis, the needle
seat can be flushed by an integrated flush pump with up to 3 different solvents
which may have different properties and solvent strengths. As soon as injection
valve is in bypass mode the flush pump delivers some solvent during a defined
time to clean the needle seat. The back flushing solvent will be guided into the
waste line attached on the needle wash port. At the end of this process the
injection valve switches back into the mainpass (main path) position ready for
the next injection. The last rinsing step should always include the mobile phase
as solvent to get the initial conditions again.
Column
Solvent
Sampling loop
P1 P2 Wash
Pump
Wash Needle
port seat
4
3
5
2
6 Metering
1
device
Multisampler
Pump Waste
Figure 9 Valve in bypass, needle seat backflush (Multiwash)

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Injection Sequence for dual needle (alternating mode)

Flushing the system
The Start of the pump or changes in solvent composition trigger the purge
routine of the multisampler. The purge routine flushes the hydraulic setup of the
multisampler with fresh mobile phase (for example metering device, sample
loops, and needles). This ensures cleanness of the flowpath.
Solvent
Wash
Sampling loops pump
Metering device
Wash
port
Needle seats
Valve pos 1
Valve pos 2
Figure 10 Valve in mainpass (main path) (right), metering device purged, and alternate dual
needle injection prepared
For pumps with a manual purge valve, it is mandatory to start the purge routine
NOTE before a run or sequence. This will guarantee that the complete flow path of the
dual needle setup is flushed with fresh mobile phase.

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
The robot moves the wellplates or vial trays from the sample hotel to the central
workspace. The injection valve unit switches to the mainpass (main path) (left)
position. Then the sampling process starts. Solvent from the pump enters the
peripheral valve at port 2, and flows through port 1 directly to the injection valve.
The solvent enters the injection valve at port 2, flows via port 1 through the
sample loop (left), the needle (left), the needle seat (left), port 5 and port 6 to the
column.
Solvent
Wash
Sampling loops pump
Metering device
Wash
port
Needle seats
Valve pos 1
Valve pos 2
Figure 11 Valve in mainpass (main path) (right), drawing sample with left needle
Drawing sample (right)

Then the needle assembly (right) moves to the desired sample position and
immerses into the sample. The plunger of the metering device moves back and
draws up the desired volume. Then the needle assembly (right) raises and moves to
the needle park station on the needle seat (right). This closes the sample loop (right).
Flush the Needle (if selected)
To reduce carryover, the outside of the left or the right needle can be washed in the
flush port that is located behind the needle park station. As soon as the needle is on
the flush port, a wash pump flushes the outside of the needle for a defined time
(defined for example in the method). After this process the needle assembly returns
to the appropriate needle park station. This closes the sample loop (right).

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Alternating Dual needle Inject and Run (Right needle)

The eight port valve switches to the mainpass (main path) (right) position. Now
Port 2 and 3 and Port 7 and 6 of the injection valve are connected. This directs
the flow through the sample loop (right) and the solvent transports the sample to
the column. Separation and analysis starts. In the meantime, the flow path (right)
is flushed internally by the solvent.
Solvent
Wash
Sampling loops pump
Metering device
Wash
port
Needle seats
Valve pos 1
Valve pos 2
Figure 12 Valve in mainpass (main path) (right), metering home (multi-load position of the
peripheral valve)

1 Introduction
Injection Sequences
Prepare Inject and Run of the alternating dual needle (left needle)
The sample container is in the central sample work space. The robot detaches
the needle assembly (left) from the needle port. The metering device drives to the
home position. Then the needle assembly (left) is moved to the desired sample
position and immerses into the sample. The plunger of the metering device
moves back and draws up the desired volume. Then the needle assembly (left)
raises and moves to the needle park station on the needle seat (left). This closes
the sample loop (left).
The left needle can be flushed as the right needle, see description above.
The eight port valve switches to the mainpass (main path) (left) position. Now
Port 2 and 1 and Port 5 and 6 of the injection valve are connected. This directs
the flow through the sample loop (left) and the solvent transports the sample to
the column. Separation and analysis starts. In the meantime, the flow path (left)
is flushed internally by the solvent.
The alternating flush and injection cycles minimize injection cycle times and
ensure maximal cleanness of the hardware.
Multi-load with Dual needle (left needle)
In the multi-load mode, the peripheral valve switches in different positions while
the plunger of the metering device moves back and forward. At the same time,
the needle remains in the sample vial or well. That way the multi-load technique
allows to draw multiple times and inject large sample volumes. This multi-load
technique is completely different from the multi-draw technique that is used in
other autosamplers.
Injection Sequence for dual needle (bypass mode)

This corresponds to the injection sequence for single needles, see “Injection
Sequence for single needle” on page 24. Only one flow path is used on a regular
basis, and a defined bypass capillary replaces either the left or the right dual
needle sample loop. This bypass capillary shortcuts one path to allow faster
reconditioning.

1 Introduction
System Overview
System Overview
Leak and Waste Handling

The Agilent InfinityLab LC Series has been designed for safe leak and waste
handling. It is important that all security concepts are understood and
instructions are carefully followed.
The solvent cabinet is designed to store a maximum volume of 8 L solvent. The
maximum volume for an individual bottle stored in the solvent cabinet should not
exceed 2 L. For details, see the usage guideline for the Agilent Infinity II Solvent
Cabinets (a printed copy of the guideline has been shipped with the solvent
cabinet, electronic copies are available on the Internet).
All leak plane outlets are situated in a consistent position so that all Infinity and
Infinity II modules can be stacked on top of each other. Waste tubes are guided
through a channel on the right hand side of the instrument, keeping the front
access clear from tubes.
The leak plane provides leak management by catching all internal liquid leaks,
guiding them to the leak sensor for leak detection, and passing them on to the
next module below, if the leak sensor fails. The leak sensor in the leak plane
stops the running system as soon as the leak detection level is reached.
Solvent and condensate is guided through the waste channel into the waste
container:
• from the detector's flow cell outlet
• from the Multisampler needle wash port
• from the Sample Cooler or Sample Thermostat (condensate)
• from the pump's Seal Wash Sensor (if applicable)
• from the pump's Purge Valve or Multipurpose Valve

1 Introduction
System Overview
Figure 13 Infinity II Leak Waste Concept (Flex Bench installation)

1 Introduction
System Overview
Figure 14 Infinity II Single Stack Leak Waste Concept (bench installation)

1 Introduction
System Overview
Figure 15 Infinity II Two Stack Leak Waste Concept (bench installation)
The waste tube connected to the leak plane outlet on each of the bottom
instruments guides the solvent to a suitable waste container.

1 Introduction
System Overview
Leak Sensor
Solvent incompatibility
C AU T I O N
The solvent DMF (dimethylformamide) leads to corrosion of the leak sensor.
The material of the leak sensor, PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride), is incompatible
with DMF.
 Do not use DMF as mobile phase.
 Check the leak sensor regularly for corrosion.
Waste Guidance
The waste drainage must go straight into the waste containers. The waste flow
NOTE must not be restricted at bends or joints.

1 Introduction
System Overview
Waste Concept
1 Agilent recommends using the 6 L waste can with 1 Stay Safe cap GL45 with
4 ports (5043-1221) for optimal and safe waste disposal. If you decide to use
your own waste solution, make sure that the tubes don't immerse in the liquid.

1 Introduction
System Overview
Leak and Waste Handling in a Mixed Configuration

Leak and Waste Handling in a Mixed Configuration
The leak pan

Detector outlet of the upper
module must be
vertically positioned
above the leak tray
of the lower module
Oven
Sampler
For the lowest module

the central waste is
guided directly into
the waste container
Pump
Figure 16 Leak and waste handling with multisampler in a mixed configuration as an example
Flush solvent from the washport of the multisampler is guided out to the right of
NOTE the instrument.

1 Introduction
System Overview
Multisampler
Figure 17 Leak and waste handling with multisampler in a mixed configuration as an example
(two stack configuration)
Do not place the multisampler directly on the bench if a sample cooler or sample
NOTE thermostat is installed.

Site Requirements 42
Physical Specifications 46
Physical Specifications Agilent 1290 Infinity II Multisampler (G7167B) 46
Physical Specifications Agilent 1260 Infinity II Multisampler (G7167A) 47
Physical Specifications Agilent 1290 Infinity II Bio Multisampler (G7137A) 48
Physical Specifications Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert Multisampler (G5668A) 49
Performance Specifications 50
Performance Specifications (G7167B) 50
Performance Specifications (G7167A) 52
Specifications of the Sample Cooler 58
Specifications of the Sample Thermostat 60
This chapter provides information on environmental requirements, physical and

performance specifications.

Site Requirements
Site Requirements
A suitable environment is important to ensure optimal performance of the

instrument.
Power Considerations
The module power supply has wide ranging capability. It accepts any line voltage
in the range described in Table 1 on page 46. Consequently there is no voltage
selector in the rear of the module. There are also no externally accessible fuses,
because automatic electronic fuses are implemented in the power supply.
Hazard of electrical shock or damage of your instrumentation

WAR N IN G
can result, if the devices are connected to a line voltage higher than
specified.
 Connect your instrument to the specified line voltage only.
The module is partially energized when switched off, as long as the power
WAR N IN G
cord is plugged in.
Repair work at the module can lead to personal injuries, e.g. electrical
shock, when the cover is opened and the module is connected to power.
 Always unplug the power cable before opening the cover.
 Do not connect the power cable to the instrument while the covers are
removed.
Inaccessible power plug.

WAR N IN G
In case of emergency it must be possible to disconnect the instrument
from the power line at any time.
 Make sure the power connector of the instrument can be easily reached
and unplugged.
 Provide sufficient space behind the power socket of the instrument to
unplug the cable.

Site Requirements
Power Cords
Country-specific power cords are available for the module. The female end of all
power cords is identical. It plugs into the power-input socket at the rear. The male
end of each power cord is different and designed to match the wall socket of a
particular country or region.
Agilent makes sure that your instrument is shipped with the power cord that is
suitable for your particular country or region.
Unintended use of power cords

WAR N IN G
Using power cords for unintended purposes can lead to personal injury or
damage of electronic equipment.
 Never use a power cord other than the one that Agilent shipped with this
instrument.
 Never use the power cords that Agilent Technologies supplies with this
instrument for any other equipment.
 Never use cables other than the ones supplied by Agilent Technologies
to ensure proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC
regulations.
Absence of ground connection

WAR N IN G
The absence of ground connection can lead to electric shock or short
circuit.
 Never operate your instrumentation from a power outlet that has no
ground connection.
Electrical shock hazard

WAR N IN G
Solvents may damage electrical cables.
 Prevent electrical cables from getting in contact with solvents.
 Exchange electrical cables after contact with solvents.

Site Requirements
Room Size and Ventilation

Flammable refrigerant
WAR N IN G
Formation of flammable gas-air mixtures inside the Sample Thermostat
and laboratory.
 Keep open fire or sources of ignition away from the device.
 Ensure a room size of 4 m3 (1 m3 for every 8 g of R600a refrigerant
inside of the Sample Thermostat).
 Ensure adequate ventilation: typical air exchange of 25 m3/h per m2 of
laboratory floor area.
 Keep all ventilation openings in the enclosure clear of obstructions. Do
not block the openings on the circumference of the Sample Thermostat.

Site Requirements
Bench Space
The module dimensions and weight (see Table 1 on page 46) allow you to place
the module on almost any desk or laboratory bench. It needs an additional
2.5 cm (1.0 inches) of space on either side and approximately 8 cm (3.1 inches)
in the rear for air circulation and electric connections.
If the bench shall carry a complete HPLC system, make sure that the bench is
designed to bear the weight of all modules.
The module should be operated in a horizontal position, especially if a Sample
Cooler or Sample Thermostat is installed. Use a bubble level to check the leveling
of the sampler.
Agilent recommends that you install the HPLC instrument in the InfinityLab Flex
NOTE Bench rack. This option helps to save bench space as all modules can be placed
into one single stack. It also allows to easily relocate the instrument to another
laboratory.
Heavy weight
WAR N IN G
The module is heavy.
 Carry the module at least with 2 people.
 Avoid back strain or injury by following all precautions for lifting heavy
objects.
 Ensure that the load is as close to your body as possible.
 Ensure that you can cope with the weight of your load.
Condensation
Condensation within the module
C AU T I O N
Condensation can damage the system electronics.
 Do not store, ship or use your module under conditions where temperature
fluctuations could cause condensation within the module.
 If your module was shipped in cold weather, leave it in its box and allow it to
warm slowly to room temperature to avoid condensation.

Physical Specifications
Physical Specifications Agilent 1290 Infinity II

Multisampler (G7167B)
Table 1 Physical Specifications
Type Specification Comments
Weight 22 kg (48.5 lbs) w/o sample thermostat
Dimensions (height × width × 320 x 396 x 468 mm

depth) (12.6 x 15.6 x 18.4 inches)
Line voltage 100 – 240 V~, ± 10 % Wide-ranging capability
Line frequency 50 or 60 Hz, ± 5 %
Power consumption 180 VA, 180 W
Ambient operating tempera- 4 - 40 °C (39 - 104 °F)

ture
Ambient non-operating tem- -40 – 70 °C (-40 – 158 °F)

perature
Humidity < 95 % r.h. at 40 °C (104 °F)1 Non-condensing
Operating altitude Up to 3000 m (9842 ft)
Safety standards: IEC, EN, Overvoltage category II, Pollution degree 2 For indoor use only.
CSA, UL
ISM Classification ISM Group 1 Class B According to CISPR 11
Permitted solvents Boiling point ≥56 °C (133 °F).

Auto-ignition temperature ≥200 °C
(392 °F).
1 If a sample thermostat is included the upper value for humidity can be reduced. Please check your lab
conditions to stay beyond dew point values for non–condensing operation.


Multisampler (G7167A)

depth) (12.6 x 15.6 x 18.4 inches)

ture

perature
CSA, UL

(392 °F).

Physical Specifications Agilent 1290 Infinity II Bio

Multisampler (G7137A)
Table 3 Physical Specifications G7137A

depth) (12.6 x 15.6 x 18.4 inches)

ture

perature
CSA, UL

(392 °F).


Bio-inert Multisampler (G5668A)

depth) (12.6 x 15.6 x 18.4 inches)

ture

perature
Non-operating altitude Up to 4600 m (15092 ft) For storing the module
CSA, UL

(392 °F).

Performance Specifications
Performance Specifications (G7167B)

Table 5 Performance Specifications G7167B
Injection range for Sin- Default: 0.1 – 20 µL in 0.1 µL increments; Up to 1300 bar using 40 µL (default) or optional
gle-needle instruments optional: 40 µL or 100 µL 100 µL analytical head
(using 100 µL analytical head)
0.1 – 500 µL or 900 µL in 0.1 µL increments Pressure range up to 400 bar due to 900 µL ana-
(using 900 µL analytical head) lytical head
0.1 – 120 µL in 0.1 µL increments with 1290 Pressure range up to 1300 bar Multi-draw mode
Infinity II large volume injection kit (Injection into needle-seat capillary)
(hardware modification required) G4216-68711
0.1 – 500 µL or 1500 µL in 0.1 µL increments
with 100 µL upgrade kit
Injection range for Default: 0.1 – 20 µL in 0.1 µL increments; Up to 1300 bar using 100 µL analytical head
Dual-needle instru- optional: 40 µL or 100 µL
ments
Up to 500 µL in 0.1 µL increments depending on Up to 1300 bar using 100 µL analytical head +
installed loop size Multi-load
Injection precision for <0.15 % RSD or SD <10 nL, whatever is greater Measured caffeine
Single-needle instru-
ments
Dual-needle instru-
ments
Injection linearity 0.9999 in the range of 0.1 – 100 µL Measured caffeine
Pressure range Up to 1300 bar Max pressure for basic instrument
Sample viscosity range 0.2 – 5.0 cP

Table 5 Performance Specifications G7167B
Sample capacity 1H Drawer up to 8 drawers and 16 positions Max. 6144/1536 samples (384 MTP/96)
shallow well plates (MTP)
2H Drawer up to 4 drawers and 8 positions 3072 samples, 432 vials (2 mL)

MTP, deep well plates, vials, Eppendorf
3H Drawer up to 2 drawers and 4 positions 1536 samples, 60 vials (6 mL),

MTP, deep well plates, vials up to 6 mL, Eppen- 384 vials (1 mL), 216 vials (2 mL)
dorf
Injection cycle time <10 s using following standard conditions: Time between 2 injections is not mechanically
Default draw speed: 100 µL/min limited, time delay depends on communication
Default eject speed: 400 µL/min speed of software, OS or network connections
Injection volume: 1 µL
Carryover <0.003 % (30 ppm) Multisampler Standard and Sample: Chlorhexidine

Dual Needle
<0.0009 % (9 ppm) Multisampler Multiwash
Multiwash Outer needle wash and seat backflush for carry-

over reduction with up to 3 different solvents
Instrument Control LC & CE Drivers A.02.10 or above For details about supported software versions
Instrument Control Framework (ICF) A.02.03 or refer to the compatibility matrix of your version
above of the LC and CE Drivers
Instant Pilot (G4208A) with firmware B.02.19 or
above
Lab Advisor B.02.06 or above
Communication Controller Area Network (CAN), Local Area Net-

work (LAN)
ERI: ready, start, stop and shut-down signals
Maintenance and Extensive diagnostics, error detection and dis-

safety-related features play with Agilent Lab Advisor software
Leak detection, safe leak handling, leak output
signal for shutdown of pumping system, and
low voltages in major maintenance areas
GLP features Early maintenance feedback (EMF) for continu-

ous tracking of instrument usage with user-set-
table limits and feedback messages. Electronic
records of maintenance and errors.
Housing All materials recyclable.

Performance Specifications (G7167A)

Table 6 Performance Specifications G7167A
Injection range for Sin- Default: 0.1 – 100 µL in 0.1 µL increments Up to 800 bar using the 100 µL (default) or
gle-needle instruments optional: 20 µL or 40 µL optional 40 µL analytical head
(using optional 40 µL analytical head)
0.1 – 500 µL or 900 µL in 0.1 µL increments Pressure range up to 400 bar due to 900 µL ana-
(using 900 µL analytical head) lytical head
0.1 – 120 µL in 0.1 µL increments with 1290 Pressure range up to 800 bar Multi-draw mode
Infinity II large volume injection kit (Injection into needle-seat capillary)
0.1 – 500 µL or 1500 µL in 0.1 µL increments
with 100 µL upgrade kit
Injection range for Default: 0.1 – 100 µL in 0.1 µL increments; Up to 800 bar using 100 µL analytical head
Dual-needle instru- optional: 20 µL or 40 µL
ments (using 100 µL analytical head)
Up to 900 µL in 0.1 µL increments depending on Up to 800 bar using 100 µL analytical head
installed loop size
single-needle instru-
ments
dual-needle instruments

Feature is available for instruments manufac-
tured in Sep 2017 or later. Requires LC and CE
Drivers A.02.17 or later.
Sample viscosity range 0.2 – 5.0 cP
Sample capacity 1H Drawer up to 8 drawers and 16 positions Max. 6144/1536 samples (384 MTP/96)


MTP, deep well plates, vials up to 6 mL, Eppen- 384 vials (1 mL), 216 vials (2 mL)
dorf

Default draw speed: 100 µL/min limited, time delay depends on communication
Injection volume: 1 µL
Carryover <0.003 % (30 ppm) Multisampler Standard and Sample: Chlorhexidine

Dual Needle

Instrument Control LC and CE Drivers A.02.10 or above For details about supported software versions
above of the LC and CE Drivers
Instant Pilot (G4208A) with firmware B.02.19 or
above

work (LAN)
Maintenance and Extensive diagnostics, error detection and dis-

safety-related features play with Agilent Lab Advisor software
signal for shutdown of pumping system, and
low voltages in major maintenance areas

ous tracking of instrument usage with user-set-
table limits and feedback messages. Electronic


Injection range Default 0.1 – 20 µL in 0.1 μL increments Up to 1300 bar using the 40 μL (default) or
optional: 40 μL or 100 μL optional 100 μL analytical head
(using optional 100 μL analytical head)
0.1 – 500 µL or 1500 μL in 0.1 increments with Pressure range up to 1300 bar Multidraw mode
100 μL upgrade kit (injection into needle-seat capillary)
(hardware modification required G7137-68711)
Injection precision < 0.15 % RSD or SD < 10 nL, whatever is greater Measured caffeine
Injection linearity > 0.9999 Measured caffeine
Pressure range Up to 1300 Max pressure for basic instrument.
Sample viscosity 0.2 – 5.0 cP

range
Sample capacity 1H Drawer up to 8 drawers and 16 positions shal- Max. 6144/1536 samples (384 MTP/96)
low well plates (MTP)
2H Drawer up to 4 drawers and 8 positions MTP, 3072 samples, 432 vials (2)
deep well plates, vials, Eppendorf
3H Drawer up to 2 drawers and 4 positions MTP, 1536 samples, 60 vials (6), 384 vials (1 mL),
deep well plates, vials up to 6 mL, Eppendorf 216 vials (2 mL)
Injection cycle time < 10 s using following standard conditions: Time between 2 injections is not mechanically
Default draw speed: 100 μL/min limited, time delay depends on communication
Injection volume: 1 μL
pH Range pH 1 – 12.5, short term pH 13 (for flushing)
Carryover < 0.003 % (30 ppm) Multisampler Standard Sample: Chlorhexidine

< 0.0009 % (9 ppm) Multisampler Multiwash

Materials in the flow MP35N, Gold, PEEK, UHMW-PE

path
Instrument control LC & CE Drivers Rev. 3.3 or above For details about supported software versions
above, available in emulation mode of the LC & CE Drivers
LC Instrument Firmware Rev. D.07.33 or above


work (LAN), ERI: ready, start, stop and shut-down
signals
Maintenance and Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display

safety-related features with Agilent Lab Advisor software.
signal for shutdown of pumping system, and low
voltages in major maintenance areas.

ous tracking of instrument usage with user-setta-
ble limits and feedback messages. Electronic
Housing All materials recyclable


Injection range Default: 0.1 – 100 µL in 0.1 µL increments Up to 600 bar using the 100 µL analytical head
0.1 – 250 µL or 1000 µL in 0.1 µL increments with Pressure range up to 400 bar Multidraw mode
Multidraw upgrade kit (Bio-inert) (Injection into needle seat capillary)
(G5667-68711) (hardware modification required)
Injection precision <0.15 % RSD or SD <10 nL, whatever is greater Measured caffeine
Sample viscosity 0.2 – 5.0 cP

range
Sample capacity 1H Drawer up to 8 drawers and 16 positions Max. 6144/1536 samples (384MTP/96)


MTP, deep well plates, vials up to 6 mL, Eppendorf 384 vials (1 mL), 216 vials (2 mL)
Default draw speed: 100 µL/min limited, time delay depends on communica-
Default eject speed: 400 µL/min tion speed of software, OS or network connec-
Injection volume: 1 µL tions
Carryover <0.003 % (30 ppm) Multisampler Standard Sample: Chlorhexidine

Multiwash Outer needle wash and seat backflush for carryover

reduction with up to 3 different solvents
Instrument Control LC and CE Drivers A.02.14 or above For details about supported software versions
Instrument Control Framework (ICF) A.02.04 or refer to the compatibility matrix of your ver-
above sion of the LC and CE Drivers
Instant Pilot (G4208) with firmware B.02.20 or
above
Communication Controller Area Network (CAN), Local Area Network

(LAN),

Maintenance and Extensive diagnostics, error detection and display

safety-related features with Agilent Lab Advisor software
Leak detection, safe leak handling, leak output sig-
nal for shutdown of pumping system, and low volt-
ages in major maintenance areas
GLP features Early maintenance feedback (EMF) for continuous

tracking of instrument usage with user-settable
limits and feedback messages. Electronic records
of maintenance and errors.

Specifications of the Sample Cooler
The Agilent Infinity II Sample Cooler is a vapor-compression refrigeration system

that uses a fluorinated greenhouse gas (HCF-134a) as the refrigerant. For
information on carbon dioxide equivalency (CDE) and global warming potential
(GWP), see the instrument label.
Table 9 Physical Specification of the Sample Cooler
Type Specification Comment
Weight < 6 kg (< 13.2 lbs)
Dimensions (height × width × depth) 205 x 340 x 370 mm

(8.1 x 13.4 x 14.6 inches)
Refrigerant gas HFC-134a (0.042 kg) Ozone depletion poten-

tial (ODP) = 0
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Current 10 A max.
Ambient operating temperature 4 – 40 ° C (39 – 104 ° F)
Ambient non-operating temperature -40 – 70 ° C (-40 – 158 ° F)
Humidity < 95 % r.h. at 40 °C (104 °F) Non-condensing
Safety standards: Installation category II, Pollution For indoor use only
IEC, EN, CSA, UL degree 2

General hazards and improper disposal

C AU T I O N
Improper disposal of the media and components used pollutes the
environment.
 The disposal or scrapping of the Sample Cooler or the Sample Thermostat
must be carried out by a qualified disposal company.
 All media must be disposed of in accordance with national and local
regulations.
 Please contact your local Agilent Service Center in regard to safe
environmental disposal of the appliance or check www.agilent.com for
more info.
Table 10 Performance Specifications of the Sample Cooler
Type Specifications
Operating principle High performance, low-energy consumption

micro-compressor based cooler with
ozone-friendly HFC-134a coolant (42 g),
user-upgradable.
Temperature range from 4 °C to 5 °C below ambient
Temperature settable from 4 – 40 °C in 1 ° increments
Temperature accuracy (<25 °C, <50 % r.H.) 2 °C to 6 °C at a setpoint of 4 °C
The Agilent Infinity II Sample Cooler is not available for trade sales anymore and
NOTE has been replaced by the Agilent InfinityLab Sample Thermostat.

Specifications of the Sample Thermostat
The Agilent InfinityLab Sample Thermostat is the combination of an electric

heater and a vapor-compression refrigeration system. It uses isobutane as a
non-Freon refrigerant, which is harmless to the environment and does not affect
the ozone layer and global warming but is combustible. Please adhere to the
warnings listed in the manual.
Table 11 Physical Specifications of the Sample Thermostat
Weight <6 kg (< 13.2 lbs)
Dimensions (height x 205 x 340 x 370 mm

width x depth) (8.1 x 13.4 x 14.6 inches)
Refrigerant gas R600a (0.030 kg) Ozone depletion potential (ODP) =0

Global warming potential (GWP) =3
Supply voltage 24VDC
Current 10 A max.
Ambient operating 4 – 40 °C (39 – 104 °F)

temperature
Ambient non-operat- -40 – 70 °C (-40 – 158 °F)

ing temperature
Humidity < 95 % r.h. at 40 °C (104 °F) Non-condensing
Safety standards: IEC, Installation category II, Pollution For indoor use only
EN, CSA, UL degree 2


C AU T I O N
environment.
regulations.
more info.
Table 12 Performance Specifications for the Sample Thermostat
Type Specifications
Operating principle High performance, low-energy consumption micro-compressor based

cooler with natural R600a coolant (Butane 30 g), user-upgradable
Temperature range from 4 – 40 °C
Temperature settable from 4 – 40 °C in 1 ° increments
Temperature accuracy 2 °C to 6 °C at a setpoint of 4 °C

(<25 °C, <50 % r.H.)
Minimum firmware revision for the Sample Thermostat is D.07.22.

NOTE
Minimum LC driver revision for the Sample Thermostat is A.02.14.

3 Installation
Unpacking the Module 63

Damage to the module 63
Delivery Checklist 64
Optimizing the Stack Configuration 65
One Stack Configuration 66
Two Stack Configuration 68
Install the Module 69
Flow Connections to the Multisampler 73
This chapter gives information about the preferred stack setup for your system
and the installation of your module.

3 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Damage to the module

Damaged Packaging
If the delivery packaging shows signs of external damage, please call your Agilent
Technologies sales and service office immediately. Inform your service
representative that the instrument may have been damaged during shipment.
"Defective on arrival" problems

C AU T I O N
If there are signs of damage, please do not attempt to install the module.
Inspection by Agilent is required to evaluate if the instrument is in good
condition or damaged.
 Notify your Agilent sales and service office about the damage.
 An Agilent service representative will inspect the instrument at your site and
initiate appropriate actions.
Condensation
Condensation within the module

C AU T I O N
Condensation can damage the system electronics.
 Do not store, ship or use your module under conditions where temperature
fluctuations could cause condensation within the module.
 If your module was shipped in cold weather, leave it in its box and allow it to
warm slowly to room temperature to avoid condensation.

3 Installation
Delivery Checklist
Ensure all parts and materials have been delivered with your module. The delivery
checklist is shown below.
For parts identification please check the illustrated parts breakdown in section
Overview of Maintenance Parts.
Please report any missing or damaged parts to your local Agilent Technologies
sales and service office.
Table 13 Delivery checklist
Description Quantity
Multisampler 1
Power cable 1
Agilent InfinityLab LC Series User Documentation (G4800-64600) 1 per order
Accessory Kit (G4267-68705 / G7167-68715 / G5668-68705 / 1

G7137-68705)
Table 14 Delivery checklist for the Sample Thermostat
Sample Thermostat (G7167-60101) 1
Condensate Drainage Kit (5067-6208) 1
Declaration of Conformity 1
Customer Letter 1

3 Installation
Optimizing the Stack Configuration
You can ensure optimum performance by installing the system in one of the
following configurations. These configurations optimize the system flow path,
ensuring minimum delay volume.

3 Installation
One Stack Configuration

One Stack Configuration in an Agilent 1290 Infinity II System
Ensure optimum performance by stacking the modules as shown exemplarily in
Figure 18 on page 66. This configuration optimizes the flow path for minimum
delay volume and minimizes the bench space required.
Solvent cabinet
Detector
Column
compartment
Sampler
Pump
Figure 18 Single stack configuration (bench installation, example shows a Multisampler)

3 Installation
One Stack Configuration (Multisampler in an Agilent 1260 Infinity LC

System)
Solvent cabinet
Pump
Sampler
Column compartment
Detector
Figure 19 Example setup based on an Agilent 1260 Infinity Multisampler with Quaternary Pump
G1311B

3 Installation
Two Stack Configuration

To avoid excessive height of the stack (for example when using the system in
combination with an additional detector) it is recommended to form two stacks.
Column compartment
Detectors
Solvent cabinet
Sampler
Pump
Figure 20 Two stack configuration (bench installation, example shows a Multisampler)

3 Installation
Install the Module
Install the Module
Parts required Description

Multisampler
Power cord
Hardware required Other cables see below and “Cable Overview” on page 463
Software required OpenLab CDS and/or Local Controller with the appropriate revisions, see Table 5 on page 50.
The module is partially energized when switched off, as long as the power
WAR N IN G
cord is plugged in.
Repair work at the module can lead to personal injuries, e.g. electrical
shock, when the cover is opened and the module is connected to power.
 Always unplug the power cable before opening the cover.
 Do not connect the power cable to the instrument while the covers are
removed.

C AU T I O N

3 Installation
Install the Module
1 Place the Multisampler in the stack, see “Optimizing the 2 Ensure the power switch on the front of the module is
Stack Configuration” on page 65. OFF (switch stands out).
3 Connect the power cable to the power connector at the 4 Connect the CAN cable to other Agilent Infinity II mod-
rear of the module. ules.

3 Installation
Install the Module
5 Connect the ERI cable (optional) for non-Agilent instru- 6 Remove the transport foam.
ments.

3 Installation
Install the Module
7 Turn on the power by pushing the button at the lower

left hand side of the module.
The power button stays pressed in and the status LED
should be green (1).
When the line power button stands out and the green light is off, the module is
NOTE turned off.
The module was shipped with default configuration settings. For changing these
NOTE settings, refer to “Setting the 6-bit Configuration Switch” on page 494.

3 Installation
Flow Connections to the Multisampler

System
Note: for the VICI injection valve please be aware you must use only capillaries and correct SL/SX or
SI fittings, see “Installing Capillaries” on page 135.
Preparations Multisampler is installed in system.
Toxic, flammable and hazardous solvents, samples and reagents

WAR N IN G
The handling of solvents, samples and reagents can hold health and safety
risks.
 When working with these substances observe appropriate safety
procedures (for example by wearing goggles, safety gloves and
protective clothing) as described in the material handling and safety
data sheet supplied by the vendor, and follow good laboratory practice.
 The volume of substances should be reduced to the minimum required
for the analysis.
 Do not operate the instrument in an explosive atmosphere.
In an Agilent 1290 Infinity system, the stack configuration from bottom to top
NOTE should be: pump, sampler, column compartment, detector.
In an Agilent 1260 Infinity system, the stack configuration from bottom to top
should be: detector, column compartment, sampler, pump.
For details, see “Optimizing the Stack Configuration” on page 65.
1 Open the front door by pressing the door button of the module.
2 Install the capillary from the pump outlet into the port 1 of the injection valve.
a For G7167A/B: Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1246) or
similar.
b For G7137A: Capillary MP35N 0.17 mm x 500 mm, SI/SI (5500-1419) or
similar.
c For G5668A: Capillary Ti 0.17 mm x 500 mm, SL/SLV (5500-1264).

3 Installation
3 Install the capillary from the port 6 of the injection valve to the MCT or TCC.
a For G7167A: Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1246).
b For G7167B: Capillary ST, 0.12 mm x 500 mm SL/S (5500-1157).
c For G7137A: Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1279).
d For G5668A: Capillary PK/ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm, RLO/RLO (Bio-inert)
(G5667-81005).
When you replace a 1290 multisampler in a current stack, you have to use a
NOTE capillary with a long fitting which fits in the VICI valve.

3 Installation
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Standard
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Standard
from solvent bottle
Peristaltic pump
to washport
Sample loop flex
Metering device
1
from pump (port 1) 2
to column (port 6) 6
plastic blank nut 3
5 Injection valve
(port 3)
4
to waste (port 4)
to needle seat
(port 5)
Figure 21 Capillary connections (Standard)

3 Installation
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Multiwash
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Multiwash
Solvents on cabinet
to washport
SSV/piezo pump
to flush pump
Flush pump
to column (port 6)
Sample loop flex
to washport/
Metering device
needle seat
(port 4)
to metering device
(port 2) 1
2 6
Injection valve
Plastic blank nut 3
(port 3) 5
to needle seat 4
(port 5)
from pump (port 1)
Figure 22 Capillary connections (Multiwash)

3 Installation
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Dual Needle
Flow Connections to the Multisampler Dual Needle
from solvent bottle
Peristaltic pump
to washport
2 1
from pump
3 6 Peripheral valve
5
4
metering device
Sample loop left needle
2 1
3
Sample loop right needle
8 Injection valve
6 7
to column
5
4
to left needle seat
to right needle seat
Figure 23 Capillary connections (Dual-Needle)
The Multisampler can only be operated with the front door closed. For optimum
NOTE operation do not leave the drawers open for any longer than necessary.
It is not possible to use the multidraw feature with the multiwash and dual needle
NOTE setup at the moment.

4 Using the Module
Magnets 79
Turn on/off 80
Status indicators 82
Drawer Status Indicator 83
Insert vial trays/wellplates 84
Remove vial trays/wellplates 85
Installing the Optional Sample Cooler/Thermostat 86
Unpacking the Unit 86
Install the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 87
Using the Optional Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 94
Dashboard 95
Control Interface 96
Control 97
Temperature Mode 99
Online Signal Monitor 100
Reporting Sample Temperature 101
Operation Information 102
Transporting the Sampler 104
Prepare a Sampler Without Cooler/Thermostat for Transportation 104
Prepare a Sampler with Cooler/Thermostat for Transportation 105
Install the Transport Protection Foam 107
Materials used in the 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert System 111
Materials used in the 1290 Infinity II Bio LC System 112
Material Information 114
Reset the Multisampler in Case of an Error 120
Agilent Local Control Modules 123
This chapter explains the essential operational parameters of the module.

4 Using the Module
Magnets
Magnets
1 Magnet in door of the multisampler. 2 Magnets in drawers of the multisampler

4 Using the Module
Turn on/off
Turn on/off
This procedure exemplarily shows an arbitrary LC stack configuration.
1 2
Power switch: On

4 Using the Module
Turn on/off
3 Turn instrument On/Off with the control software. 4
Power switch: Off

5

4 Using the Module
Status indicators
Status indicators
This procedure exemplarily shows an arbitrary LC stack configuration.

1 The module status indicator indicates one of six possible module conditions:
Status indicators
1. Idle
2. Run mode
3. Not-ready. Waiting for a specific pre-run condition to be reached or
completed.
4. Error mode - interrupts the analysis and requires attention (for example, a
leak or defective internal components).
5. Resident mode (blinking) - for example, during update of main firmware.
6. Bootloader mode (fast blinking). Try to re-boot the module or try a
cold-start. Then try a firmware update.

4 Using the Module
Drawer Status Indicator
Drawer Status Indicator
The module status indicator indicates one of three possible module conditions:
• When the status indicator is OFF no sample containers are loaded.
• When the upper, lower or both semi circle status indicators are ON, indicates
the rear or front position of the drawer or both positions are loaded with a
sample containers.
• When semi circle indicators are blinking the robot interacts with a drawer.
Do not open the drawers when the drawer status indicator is blinking.
NOTE
Drawer status indicator

4 Using the Module
Insert vial trays/wellplates
Insert vial trays/wellplates
1 2
3 4 Check the orientation of the vial tray/wellplates and

ensure correct seat by pressing down the plate. When
the lever sensor has detected the plate correctly the
front LED lights up and the device recognizes the
assignment.
5 6
7 Configure the vial tray/wellplate type in the chromatographic data system (see Table 29 on page 149).

4 Using the Module
Remove vial trays/wellplates
Remove vial trays/wellplates
1 2
3 4
5 6

4 Using the Module
Installing the Optional Sample Cooler/Thermostat
Unpacking the Unit

Damaged Packaging
If the delivery packaging shows signs of external damage, please call your Agilent
Technologies sales and service office immediately. Inform your service
representative that the instrument may have been damaged during shipment.

C AU T I O N
Delivery Checklist
Ensure that all parts and materials have been delivered with your module. The
delivery checklist is shown below. For parts identification, please check the
illustrated parts breakdown in “Sample Thermostat” on page 460. Please report
any missing or damaged parts to your local Agilent Technologies sales and
service office.
Table 15 Delivery checklist for the Sample Thermostat
Sample Thermostat (G7167-60101) 1
Condensate Drainage Kit (5067-6208) 1
Declaration of Conformity 1
Customer Letter 1
The Agilent Infinity II Sample Cooler is not available for trade sales anymore and
NOTE has been replaced by the Agilent InfinityLab Sample Thermostat.

4 Using the Module
Install the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
Tools required p/n Description

8710-0899 Screwdriver Pozidrive Shaft
(for the Sample Cooler)
5182-3466 Torx screwdriver T10
(for the Sample Thermostat)
OR 5023-3089 Torx key set
Parts required # p/n Description

1 Multisampler
1 G7167-60005 Sample Cooler
OR 1 G7167-60101 Sample Thermostat
1 Power cord
1 G7167-90171 Installation of the Infinity II Cooler/Thermostat Condensate
Drainage Tubing Kit
Preparations Sampler is installed in the stack.
WAR N IN G
and laboratory.
Flammable refrigerant used

WAR N IN G
 When handling, installing and operating the Sample Thermostat, care
should be taken to avoid damage to the refrigerant tubing or any part of
the Sample Thermostat.

4 Using the Module
Condensate inside the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat

C AU T I O N
Damage to the electronics of the module
 After installation of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat, wait at least
30 min before switching on the module.
 Make sure there is no condensate inside the module.
In the event of a damage

WAR N IN G
 Ventilate the room for several minutes.
 Do not use the Sample Thermostat any more.
If the sample cooler or thermostat is disconnected from the power supply, you
NOTE should wait for at least five minutes before replugging and switching on the
compressor again.
Even under average humidity conditions, a significant amount of condensed

NOTE water gathers every day. A suitable container must be provided and emptied
regularly in order to avoid overflow.
For best cooling performance of the thermostat, the 2H drawer must be installed
NOTE in the lowest position. Use the dummy drawers (G4267-60024) if no full hotel
configuration is needed.
For the Sample Cooler installation in a sampler, the serial number of the Sample
NOTE Cooler must be DEBAT02001 or higher.
Depending on the ambient conditions in the lab, the amount of condensate can
NOTE vary from 200 mL to 2 L per day. Do not fill waste containers for the condensate
to the top. Regularly empty the waste container.

4 Using the Module
1 Ensure that the power switch on the front of the module 2 Disconnect the power cable from the sampler.
is OFF (switch stands out).
3 Loosen the four screws on the rear of the module. 4 Remove the sheet metal back cover of the sampler.

4 Using the Module
5 Slide the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat halfway

into the sampler. WAR N IN G
Module is partially energized when switched off, as long
as the power cord is plugged in.
Repair work at the module can lead to personal injuries,
e.g. shock hazard, when the cover is opened and the mod-
ule is connected to power.
 Make sure that it is always possible to access the

power plug.
 Do not use the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat if it

is not operating correctly or has been damaged. Dis-
connect it from the power supply and call your local
service center.
 Remove the power cable from the module before open-

ing the cover.
 Do not connect the power cable to the module while

the covers are removed.
 If the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat is discon-

nected from the power supply, you should wait for at
least five minutes before switching on the compressor.
C AU T I O N
Damaged electronics
 To avoid damages of the electronics of the module

make sure the power cords are unplugged before dis-
connecting or reconnecting the sampler to the Sample
Cooler/Sample Thermostat cables.
6 Connect the power cable and the data cable to the
cooler/thermostat.

4 Using the Module
8 Fix the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat with the four

C AU T I O N screws.
Damage to the cables
 Do not bend or pinch the cables.
 Make sure that the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat

fits perfectly in the sampler.
7 Slide the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat all the way
into the sampler.
9 Use a bubble level to check the leveling of the sampler. 10 Adhere a tubing holder clip to the side of the
cooler/thermostat where the condensate drainage out-
NOTE let tube is situated. Ensure a distance of 20 mm from
the bottom edge.
To ensure adequate drainage for condensate, the module
should be operated in a proper horizontal position.
20 mm

4 Using the Module
11 Mount the shortest tube (60 mm) of the condensate 12 Ensure that the tubing runs straight into the waste can-
tubing with the Y-piece on the condensate drainage out- ister without any bends or joints and it is not hindered
let tube and fix the venting tube (100 mm) in the tubing by any mechanical obstacle. Agilent recommends using
holder clip. a 6 L waste canister equipped with a suitable InfinityLab
Stay Safe cap for optimal condensate handling. If you
decide to use your own waste solution, make sure that
the tubes don't immerse in the liquid.
100 mm
mm
60
NOTE
For more information, see “Leak and Waste Handling” on
page 33.
NOTE
Depending on the ambient conditions in the lab, the amount
of condensate can vary from 200 mL to 2 L per day. Do not
fill the waste container for the condensate to the top. Regu-
larly empty the waste container.

4 Using the Module
14 Configure the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat in the

C AU T I O N CDS.
Damage to the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
 Wait at least 30 min before switching on the compres-

sor of the cooler/thermostat.
 This allows the refrigerant and system lubrication to

reach equilibrium.
13 Connect the power cable to the power connector at the
rear of the module.

4 Using the Module
Using the Optional Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
Using the Optional Sample Cooler/Sample

Thermostat
The following section describes how to operate the Agilent Infinity II Sample
Cooler and the Agilent InfinityLab Sample Thermostat using the Multisampler as
an example for the hosting sampler. The operation principle is the same for any
other Infinity II sampler type.

4 Using the Module
Dashboard
The status indicator of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat is incorporated in
the graphical user interface (GUI) of the hosting sampler, which appears
automatically when the unit is configured in the chromatography data system
(CDS). When the cooler/thermostat is turned on, the set temperature and the
actual temperature are also displayed.
1 5
6
2 7
4
9
8
10
11
1 Sampler: Turn On/Off

2 Sampler: Analytical head configuration
3 Sampler: Injection volume
4 Sampler: Hotel configuration
5 Sampler: Status indicator
6 Sampler: Early Maintenance Feedback (EMF) status
7 Sampler: Multiwash installed
8 Cooler/Thermostat: Status indicator (Off)
9 Cooler/Thermostat: Status indicator (On)
10 Cooler/Thermostat: Set temperature
11 Cooler/Thermostat: Actual temperature
The actual temperature may deviate from the set temperature by up to 3 °C,
NOTE depending on the temperature setting and ambient conditions.
If the actual temperature differs by more than ± 2 °C from the set temperature, a
NOTE yellow highlight is visible around the temperature reading. This, however, will not
prevent the system from starting a new analysis, unless the Enable Analysis >
Temperature within +/- 2 °C function is selected.

4 Using the Module
Control Interface
Right-clicking the sampler GUI will prompt the control interface, where control
and method parameters can be edited, configuration modified, and special
commands executed.

4 Using the Module
Control
With the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat installed, the Control dialog box of
the hosting Infinity II sampler will include the following
cooler/thermostat-specific control options:
• At Power On:
• Turn On Thermostat: The cooler/thermostat turns on automatically upon
powering on the sampler.
• Thermostat:
• On: The cooler/thermostat turns on and the system starts to regulate the
temperature inside the sample space towards the setpoint.
For the Sample Cooler, the set temperature must be at least 5 °C below ambient
NOTE for proper temperature control.
• Off: The cooler/thermostat turns off.

• Enable Analysis
The Enable Analysis control setting is available since LC & CE drivers A.02.19.
NOTE
• With any temperature: The analysis starts regardless of the actual

temperature inside the sampler.
• Temperature within +/- 2 °C: The analysis starts only when the actual
temperature is within the ± 2 °C range of the setpoint temperature.
The Temperature within +/- 2 °C option is only available for the Sample
NOTE Thermostat.

4 Using the Module

4 Using the Module
Temperature Mode
Selecting Modify > Temperature Mode in the Control Interface will prompt a dialog
box, where the temperature control mode can be switched between being a
method parameter or a system (control) setting:
• Constant Temperature Mode: The temperature control mode is defined as a
system (control) setting, meaning that the temperature setting is independent
of the method parameters. The temperature stays constant for all methods
within a given sequence. This control mode is the default option and
recommended for most applications.
• Variable Temperature Mode: The temperature control mode is defined as a
method parameter, meaning that the temperature setting is part of the
method parameters. The temperature can change from method to method
within a given sequence. This control mode is not recommended for most
analytical workflows but might be used for some special applications, such as
degradation studies.
For modifying the temperature mode, LC & CE drivers A.02.12 or higher are
NOTE required. If the system is run on an earlier driver version, the temperature mode is
defined as a system setting.
Before using the Variable Temperature Mode setting, here are some hints and tips
to consider:
• Changing the temperature setting from one method to another will affect all
samples inside the sampler.
• Depending on the extent of the temperature change, it could take up to a
couple of hours until the sample temperature stabilizes at the new setpoint
(for example, from 4 to 40 °C or vice versa).
• It might be beneficial to use the Temperature within +/- 2 °C function;
otherwise, the next run will start without waiting for the new setpoint being
reached.

4 Using the Module
Online Signal Monitor

In the Online Signals tab of the CDS, the actual temperature of the sample space
can be configured and plotted together with the other instrument actuals. This
enables the user to have a better overview of how the temperature changes over
time.

4 Using the Module
Reporting Sample Temperature

The actual and setpoint temperature can be included in the analysis report. For
this, the Samples > Advanced Run Information field must be included in the report
template.
Figure 24 Finding the Advanced Run Information setting in OpenLab CDS 2.4.
Figure 25 Reporting actual and setpoint temperature using theAdvanced Run Information setting.
For OpenLab CDS ChemStation, this option is only available in Intelligent

NOTE Reporting.

4 Using the Module
Operation Information
Reaching Setpoint Temperature
Depending on the ambient conditions and the sampler configuration (for
example, hotel configuration for the Multisampler), reaching the setpoint
temperature can take from 30 min up to a couple of hours.
Reaching the 4 °C setpoint from an ambient temperature of 22 °C takes about

NOTE 45 min for the Vialsampler (G7129A/B/C or G7157A), as well as for the
Multisampler (G7167A/B, G7137A, G5668A, or G4767A) with a single 2H drawer
installed.
This relatively slow ramping down of the temperature is necessary to avoid ice
NOTE formation.
For the best performance of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat, all drawers
NOTE must be installed in the sampler. For the Multisampler, use dummy drawers if no
full hotel configuration is needed.
Condensate Formation
Operating the cooler/thermostat at temperatures below ambient results in
condensate formation. This condensed water is collected in the base plate of the
cooler/thermostat and drained through the drainpipe at the back of the unit. The
container for condensate collection should be regularly emptied to ensure the
proper functioning of the system.
If the container is overfilled or the condensate tubing is blocked, the condensate

NOTE sensor is triggered, rendering the HPLC system to enter the error state (see
“Sample temperature control switched off due to condensate” on page 212).
Depending on the ambient conditions in the lab, the amount of condensate can
NOTE vary from 200 mL to 2 L per day. Waste containers for the condensate should
not be filled to the top. The waste container must be emptied regularly.
Dew Formation
Setting the cooler/thermostat from a lower to a higher temperature setpoint, or
just simply turning it off, can result in dew formation on the internal surfaces of
the sampler. This is normal and should cease after a couple of hours at the most.

4 Using the Module
Frequent Door/Drawer Opening

Opening the door(s) and/or the sample drawers frequently can compromise the
temperature stability, as fresh warm and humid air will enter each time. In a
highly humid environment, this could also lead to the formation of significant
amounts of condensate on the internal surfaces of the sampler.
Ice Formation
The Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat was designed to operate without the risk
of icing. In an unlikely event of ice formation, turn off the cooler/thermostat and
wait until it defrosts.
Do not use mechanical devices or other means to accelerate the defrosting

NOTE process.
Shutting Down
When the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat needs to be turned off for the night
or a longer period, the following best practices are recommended:
• Remove all sample containers and/or vials from the sampler.
• Let the system reach the ambient temperature. Opening the door(s) of the
sampler facilitates this process.
• Remove any condensate that might appear on the sample drawers or the
internal surfaces of the sampler.
• Make sure that all condensate is removed from the cooler/thermostat.
Gently tapping on the sides of the sampler facilitates the condensate removal.
NOTE Tilting the module towards its right back corner is not recommended as it can
damage the internal parts.

4 Using the Module
Transporting the Sampler
Prepare a Sampler Without Cooler/Thermostat for

Transportation
When The module needs to be transported or relocated.
Heavy weight
WAR N IN G
objects.
Unsecured transportation
C AU T I O N
Mechanical damage
 Secure the sampler handler assembly before transporting the sampler.
1 Remove all sample containers from the sample hotel.

2 Move the robot arm to the park position using Instant Pilot or Lab Advisor, see
“Arm Position” on page 233.
3 Turn off the sampler.
4 Install all parts of the Transport Protection, see “Install the Transport
Protection Foam” on page 107.

4 Using the Module
Prepare a Sampler with Cooler/Thermostat for

Transportation
When The module needs to be transported or relocated.
Heavy weight
WAR N IN G
objects.
Condensate inside the cooler or thermostat

C AU T I O N
Damage to the electronics
 Unplug the power cords.
 Drain off all condensate before dismounting the sample cooler or
thermostat.
 Make sure that there is no condensate left.
Unsecured transportation
C AU T I O N
Mechanical damage
 Secure the sampler handler assembly before transporting the sampler.
Moving the sampler with the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat installed is

NOTE possible for short distances (for example, from one workbench to another). For
longer transportation, remove the cooler/thermostat from the sampler and
handle the units separately.

4 Using the Module
1 Remove condensate.
a Place a suitable container underneath the outlet pipe.
b Remove the drainage tube.
c Gently tap the sides of the sampler several times to facilitate the drainage
of the condensate from the system.
Do not tilt the module to avoid damage to the internal parts.

NOTE
2 Remove all sample containers from the sample hotel.

3 Move the robot arm to the park position using Instant Pilot or Lab Advisor, see
“Arm Position” on page 233.
4 Turn off the sampler.
5 Install all parts of the Transport Protection, see “Install the Transport
Protection Foam” on page 107.
6 Remove the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat from the sampler if needed,
see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat” on page 309.

4 Using the Module
Install the Transport Protection Foam
When To secure the transport arm before transporting or shipping the sampler.
Parts required p/n Description

G4267-40033 Transport Protection
Preparations
• All sample containers are removed from the sample hotel.
• Module is switched off.
1 Open the front door. 2 Manually move the robot arm to the right back corner of
the lobby (park position).
3 Carefully slide the right protection foam piece into the 4 Position the foam next to the hydraulic box such that it
sampler. sits behind the needle port.

4 Using the Module
5 Slide the left protection foam piece into the sampler. 6 Firmly push it into place until it snaps in behind the hotel
support frame.
7 Place the protection foam of the hydraulic box in a way 8 Verify that all three protection foams are in the correct
that it snaps onto the analytical head. position.
9 Close the front door.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Solvent Information
Observe the following recommendations on the use of solvents.

• Follow the recommendations for avoiding the growth of algae, see the pump
manuals.
• Small particles can permanently block capillaries and valves. Therefore,
always filter solvents through 0.22 µm filters.
• Avoid or minimize the use of solvents that may corrode parts in the flow path.
Consider specifications for the pH range given for different materials such as
flow cells, valve materials etc. and recommendations in subsequent sections.
Recommended Wash Solvents

• water
• ethanol
• methanol
• water/acid (especially for basic compounds)
• water/base (especially for acidic compounds)
• water/acetonitrile
For different wash solvents as mentioned above, verify that the wash solvent is
NOTE suitable for the silicone wash tubing.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Solvent Compatibility of Tubings for Peristaltic

Pumps
The table shows the chemical resistance properties of Silicone and PharMed
tubing to different needle wash solvents:
Table 16 Solvent Compatibility of Silicone and PharMed Tubing
Silicone PharMed
Acids
• weak • good • very good
• medium • unsatisfactory • good
• strong • not recommended • not recommended
Alkaline solution
• weak • good • very good
• medium • unsatisfactory • very good
• strong • not recommended • good
Hydrocarbons
• aliphatic •not recommended
• aromatizised •not recommended
• halogenated •not recommended

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Materials used in the 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert System

For the Bio-inert LC system, Agilent Technologies uses highest quality materials in
the flow path (also referred to as wetted parts), which are widely accepted by life
science scientists, as they are known for optimum inertness to biological samples
and ensure best compatibility with common samples and solvents over a wide pH
range. Explicitly, the complete flow path is free of stainless steel and free of other
alloys containing metals such as iron, nickel, cobalt, chromium, molybdenum or
copper, which can interfere with biological samples. The flow downstream of the
sample introduction contains no metals whatsoever.
Table 17 Used Bio-inert materials
Module Materials
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert Pump Titanium, gold, platinum-iridium, ceramic, ruby, PTFE,
(G5654A) PEEK
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert Multisampler Upstream of sample introduction:
(G5668A) • Titanium, gold, PTFE, PEEK, ceramic
Downstream of sample introduction:
• PEEK, ceramic
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert Manual Injector PEEK, ceramic
(G5628A)
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert Analytical Fraction Collector PEEK, ceramic, PTFE
(G5664B)
Bio-inert Flow Cells:
Standard flow cell bio-inert, 10 mm, 13 µL, 120 bar (12 MPa) for PEEK, ceramic, sapphire, PTFE
MWD/DAD, includes 0890-1763 – 0.18 x 1500 mm PEEK capillary and
5063-6591 – PEEK fittings (G5615-60022)
(for Agilent 1260 Infinity II DAD G7115A, and MWD G7165A)
Bio-inert flow cell, 8 µL, 20 bar (pH 1–12), includes 0890-1763 – 0.18 x PEEK, fused silica, PTFE
1500 mm PEEK capillary and 5063-6591 – PEEK fittings (G5615-60005)
(for Agilent 1260 Infinity II FLD G7121A/B)
Bio-inert Heat Exchangers, Valves and Capillaries:
Quick Connect Heat Exchanger Bio-inert (G7116-60041) PEEK (steel-cladded)
(for Agilent 1260 Infinity II Multicolumn Thermostat G7116A)
Bio-inert Valve heads (G4235A, G5631A, G5632A, G5639A) PEEK, ceramic (Al2O3 based)
Bio-inert Connection capillaries Upstream of sample introduction:
• Titanium
Downstream of sample introduction:
• Agilent uses stainless-steel-cladded PEEK capillar-
ies, which keep the flow path free of steel and pro-
vide pressure stability up to 600 bar.
To ensure optimum bio-compatibility of your Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert LC

NOTE system, do not include non-inert standard modules or parts to the flow path. Do
not use any parts that are not labeled as Agilent “Bio-inert”. For solvent
compatibility of these materials, see “Material Information” on page 114.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Materials used in the 1290 Infinity II Bio LC System

For the 1290 Infinity II Bio LC System, Agilent Technologies uses highest quality
materials in the flow path (also referred to as wetted parts). Life scientists accept
these materials, as they are known for optimum inertness to biological samples
and ensure best compatibility with common samples and solvents over a wide
pH range. To enable chromatography at very high pressures, while maintaining
inertness the metal alloy MP35N is used instead of stainless steel throughout the
system.
The MP35N is a nonmagnetic, nickel-cobalt-chromium-molybdenum alloy with
an excellent resistance to sulfation, oxidation, saline solutions, and most mineral
acids. Its superior properties guaranty reliable performance, even under UHPLC
conditions.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Table 18 Used Bio-compatible materials
Module Materials
Agilent 1290 Infinity Bio High-Speed Pump MP35N, gold, platinum-iridium, ceramic, ruby,
(G7132A) PTFE, PEEK, UHMW-PE, tantalum, TFE/PDD
copolymer, PFA, FEP, FFKM
Agilent 1290 Infinity Bio Multisampler (G7137A) Standard: MP35N, gold, DLC coated MP35N,
PEEK, UHMW-PE Multi Wash: PEEK, FFKM, tita-
nium, PTFE, PPS, MP35N, gold, DLC coated
MP35N, UHMW-PE
Bio-compatible Flow Cells:
Max-Light Cartridge Cell LSS (10 mm) MP35N, fused silica, PEEK
(G7117-60020)
(for Agilent 1290 Infinity II DAD (G7117A/B))
Bio standard flow cell VWD, 10 mm 14 µl, RFID Sapphire, MP35N, FEP
(G1314-60188)
(for Agilent 1290 Infinity II VWD (G7114B)
Bio micro flow cell VWD, 3 mm, 2 µl, RFID Sapphire, MP35N, FEP
(G1314-60189)
(for Agilent 1290 Infinity II VWD (G7114B)
Bio-compatible Heat Exchangers, Valves and Capillaries:
Quick Connect Bio Heat Exchanger Standard MP35N

Flow (G7116-60071), Quick Connect Bio Heat
Exchanger High Flow (G7116-60081), Quick Con-
nect Heat Exchanger 1290 Bio ULD
(G7116-60091)
(for Agilent 1290 Infinity II Multicolumn Thermo-
stat (G7116B))
2-position/10-port valve, bio 1300 bar (G5641A) MP35N coated with DLC, PEEK
12ps/13pt valve, bio-inert (G4235A) PEEK, ceramic (Al2O3 based)
Bio connection capillaries MP35N
To ensure optimum bio-compatibility of your Agilent 1290 Infinity II Bio LC

NOTE System, do not include non-Bio standard modules or parts to the flow path. Do
not use any parts that are not labeled as Agilent “Bio”. For solvent compatibility of
these materials, see “Material Information” on page 114

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Material Information
Materials in the flow path are carefully selected based on Agilent’s experiences in
developing highest-quality instruments for HPLC analysis over several decades.
These materials exhibit excellent robustness under typical HPLC conditions. For
any special condition, please consult the material information section or contact
Agilent.
Disclaimer
Subsequent data was collected from external resources and is meant as a
reference. Agilent cannot guarantee the correctness and completeness of such
information. Data is based on compatibility libraries, which are not specific for
estimating the long-term life time under specific but highly variable conditions of
UHPLC systems, solvents, solvent mixtures and samples. Information can also
not be generalized due to catalytic effects of impurities like metal ions,
complexing agents, oxygen etc. Apart from pure chemical corrosion, other
effects like electro corrosion, electrostatic charging (especially for
non-conductive organic solvents), swelling of polymer parts etc. need to be
considered. Most data available refers to room temperature (typically 20 – 25 °C,
68 – 77 °F). If corrosion is possible, it usually accelerates at higher temperatures.
If in doubt, please consult technical literature on chemical compatibility of
materials.
MP35N
MP35N is a nonmagnetic, nickel-cobalt-chromium-molybdenum alloy
demonstrating excellent corrosion resistance (for example, against nitric and
sulfuric acids, sodium hydroxide, and seawater) over a wide range of
concentrations and temperatures. In addition, this alloy shows exceptional
resistance to high-temperature oxidation. Due to excellent chemical resistance
and toughness, the alloy is used in diverse applications: dental products, medical
devices, nonmagnetic electrical components, chemical and food processing
equipment, marine equipment. Treatment of MP35N alloy samples with 10 %
NaCl in HCl (pH 2.0) does not reveal any detectable corrosion. MP35N also
demonstrates excellent corrosion resistance in a humid environment. Although
the influence of a broad variety of solvents and conditions has been tested, users
should keep in mind that multiple factors can affect corrosion rates, such as
temperature, concentration, pH, impurities, stress, surface finish, and dissimilar
metal contacts.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS)

Polyphenylene sulfide has outstanding stability even at elevated temperatures. It
is resistant to dilute solutions of most inorganic acids, but it can be attacked by
some organic compounds and oxidizing reagents. Nonoxidizing inorganic acids,
such as sulfuric acid and phosphoric acid, have little effect on polyphenylene
sulfide, but at high concentrations and temperatures, they can still cause material
damage. Nonoxidizing organic chemicals generally have little effect on
polyphenylene sulfide stability, but amines, aromatic compounds, and
halogenated compounds may cause some swelling and softening over extended
periods of time at elevated temperatures. Strong oxidizing acids, such as nitric
acid (> 0.1 %), hydrogen halides (> 0.1 %), peroxy acids (> 1 %), or chlorosulfuric
acid degrade polyphenylene sulfide. It is not recommended to use polyphenylene
sulfide with oxidizing material, such as sodium hypochlorite and hydrogen
peroxide. However, under mild environmental conditions, at low concentrations
and for short exposure times, polyphenylene sulfide can withstand these
chemicals, for example, as ingredients of common disinfectant solutions.
PEEK
PEEK (Polyether-Ether Ketones) combines excellent properties regarding
biocompatibility, chemical resistance, mechanical and thermal stability. PEEK is
therefore the material of choice for UHPLC and biochemical instrumentation.
It is stable in the specified pH range (for the Bio-Inert LC system: pH 1 – 13, see
bio-inert module manuals for details), and inert to many common solvents.
There is still a number of known incompatibilities with chemicals such as
chloroform, methylene chloride, THF, DMSO, strong acids (nitric acid > 10 %,
sulfuric acid > 10 %, sulfonic acids, trichloroacetic acid), halogens or aqueous
halogen solutions, phenol and derivatives (cresols, salicylic acid, and so on).
When used above room temperature, PEEK is sensitive to bases and various
organic solvents, which can cause it to swell. Under such conditions, normal
PEEK capillaries are sensitive to high pressure. Therefore, Agilent uses stainless
steel cladded PEEK capillaries in bio-inert systems. The use of stainless steel
cladded PEEK capillaries keeps the flow path free of steel and ensures pressure
stability up to 600 bar. If in doubt, consult the available literature about the
chemical compatibility of PEEK.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Polyimide
Agilent uses semi-crystalline polyimide for rotor seals in valves and needle seats
in autosamplers. One supplier of polyimide is DuPont, which brands polyimide as
Vespel, which is also used by Agilent.
Polyimide is stable in a pH range between 1 and 10 and in most organic solvents.
It is incompatible with concentrated mineral acids (e.g. sulphuric acid), glacial
acetic acid, DMSO and THF. It is also degraded by nucleophilic substances like
ammonia (e.g. ammonium salts in basic conditions) or acetates.
Polyethylene (PE)
Agilent uses UHMW (ultra-high molecular weight)-PE/PTFE blends for yellow
piston and wash seals, which are used in 1290 Infinity pumps, 1290 Infinity II
pumps, the G7104C and for normal phase applications in 1260 Infinity pumps.
Polyethylene has a good stability for most common inorganic solvents including
acids and bases in a pH range of 1 to 12.5. It is compatible with many organic
solvents used in chromatographic systems like methanol, acetonitrile and
isopropanol. It has limited stability with aliphatic, aromatic and halogenated
hydrocarbons, THF, phenol and derivatives, concentrated acids and bases. For
normal phase applications, the maximum pressure should be limited to 200 bar.
Tantalum (Ta)
Tantalum is inert to most common HPLC solvents and almost all acids except
fluoric acid and acids with free sulfur trioxide. It can be corroded by strong bases
(e.g. hydroxide solutions > 10 %, diethylamine). It is not recommended for the use
with fluoric acid and fluorides.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Stainless Steel (SST)

Stainless steel is inert against many common solvents. It is stable in the
presence of acids and bases in a pH range of 1 to 12.5. It can be corroded by
acids below pH 2.3. It can also corrode in following solvents:
• Solutions of alkali halides, their respective acids (for example, lithium iodide,
potassium chloride, and so on) and aqueous solutions of halogens.
• High concentrations of inorganic acids like nitric acid, sulfuric acid and
organic solvents especially at higher temperatures (replace, if your
chromatography method allows, by phosphoric acid or phosphate buffer
which are less corrosive against stainless steel).
• Halogenated solvents or mixtures which form radicals and/or acids, for
example:
2 CHCl3 + O2→ 2 COCl2 + 2 HCl
This reaction, in which stainless steel probably acts as a catalyst, occurs
quickly with dried chloroform if the drying process removes the stabilizing
alcohol.
• Chromatographic grade ethers, which can contain peroxides (for example,
THF, dioxane, diisopropylether). Such ethers should be filtered through dry
aluminium oxide which adsorbs the peroxides.
• Solutions of organic acids (acetic acid, formic acid, and so on) in organic
solvents. For example, a 1 % solution of acetic acid in methanol will attack
steel.
• Solutions containing strong complexing agents (for example, EDTA, ethylene
diamine tetra-acetic acid).
• Mixtures of carbon tetrachloride with isopropanol or THF.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Titanium (Ti)
Titanium is highly resistant to oxidizing acids (for example, nitric, perchloric and
hypochlorous acid) over a wide range of concentrations and temperatures. This
is due to a thin oxide layer on the surface, which is stabilized by oxidizing
compounds. Non-oxidizing acids (for example, hydrochloric, sulfuric and
phosphoric acid) can cause slight corrosion, which increases with acid
concentration and temperature. For example, the corrosion rate with 3 % HCl
(about pH 0.1) at room temperature is about 13 μm/year. At room temperature,
titanium is resistant to concentrations of about 5 % sulfuric acid (about pH 0.3).
Addition of nitric acid to hydrochloric or sulfuric acids significantly reduces
corrosion rates. Titanium is sensitive to acidic metal chlorides like FeCl3 or CuCl2.
Titanium is subject to corrosion in anhydrous methanol, which can be avoided by
adding a small amount of water (about 3 %). Slight corrosion is possible with
ammonia > 10 %.
Diamond-Like Carbon (DLC)

Diamond-Like Carbon is inert to almost all common acids, bases and solvents.
There are no documented incompatibilities for HPLC applications.
Fused silica and Quartz (SiO2)

Fused silica is used in Max Light Cartridges. Quartz is used for classical flow cell
windows. It is inert against all common solvents and acids except hydrofluoric
acid and acidic solvents containing fluorides. It is corroded by strong bases and
should not be used above pH 12 at room temperature. The corrosion of flow cell
windows can negatively affect measurement results. For a pH greater than 12,
the use of flow cells with sapphire windows is recommended.
Gold
Gold is inert to all common HPLC solvents, acids and bases within the specified
pH range. It can be corroded by complexing cyanides and concentrated acids like
aqua regia.

4 Using the Module
Solvent Information
Zirconium Oxide (ZrO2)

Zirconium Oxide is inert to almost all common acids, bases and solvents. There
are no documented incompatibilities for HPLC applications.
Platinum/Iridium
Platinum/Iridium is inert to almost all common acids, bases and solvents. There
are no documented incompatibilities for HPLC applications.
Fluorinated polymers (PTFE, PFA, FEP, FFKM, PVDF)

Fluorinated polymers like PTFE (polytetrafluorethylene), PFA (perfluoroalkoxy),
and FEP (fluorinated ethylene propylene) are inert to almost all common acids,
bases, and solvents. FFKM is perfluorinated rubber, which is also resistant to
most chemicals. As an elastomer, it may swell in some organic solvents like
halogenated hydrocarbons.
TFE/PDD copolymer tubings, which are used in all Agilent degassers except
G1322A/G7122A, are not compatible with fluorinated solvents like Freon,
Fluorinert, or Vertrel. They have limited life time in the presence of
hexafluoroisopropanol (HFIP). To ensure the longest possible life with HFIP, it is
best to dedicate a particular chamber to this solvent, not to switch solvents, and
not to let dry out the chamber. For optimizing the life of the pressure sensor, do
not leave HFIP in the chamber when the unit is off.
The tubing of the leak sensor is made of PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride), which is
incompatible with the solvent DMF (dimethyl formamide).
Sapphire, Ruby and Al2O3-based ceramics

Sapphire, ruby and ceramics based on aluminum oxide Al2O3 are inert to almost
all common acids, bases and solvents. There are no documented
incompatibilities for HPLC applications.

4 Using the Module
Reset the Multisampler in Case of an Error
When In some cases the multisampler has to be reset by the user in order for the system to resume work-
ing in normal operation mode.
Risk of injury by uncovered needle

WAR N IN G
An uncovered needle is a risk of harm to the operator.
 Open the safety lock of the needle assembly only on the sample handler
and for this particular procedure.
 Be careful working at the z-robot.
 Wear safety gloves when removing the needle assembly.

4 Using the Module
Resetting the Multisampler
1 Check the condition of the needle assembly and the

sample loop. Replace them if necessary, see “Remove WAR N IN G
the Needle Assembly” on page 252 and “Remove the Risk of injury by uncovered needle
Sample Loop-Flex” on page 293 An uncovered needle is a risk of harm to the operator.
 Open the safety lock of the needle assembly only on

NOTE the sample handler and for this particular procedure.
Take care that the needle is installed properly. The plastic
adapter must be installed correctly and the sample loop  Be careful working at the z-robot.
should not be kinked.
 Wear safety gloves when removing the needle assem-
bly.
2 Unlock the needle.
NOTE
This procedure is completely different than the standard PM
replacement of the needle assembly in Lab Advisor. The
safety lock of the needle assembly has to be released by
carefully sliding the pusher upwards.

4 Using the Module
3 Verify that the needle assembly is unlocked after instal- 4 Reset the multisampler (using the instrument control)
lation. or turn the instrument Off/On again to start the initial-
ization.
Next Steps:
5 Close the front door.

6 Wait until the initialization of the multisampler is completed.
7 If the error persists, contact your local service representive.

4 Using the Module
Agilent Local Control Modules
Agilent Local Control Modules
Agilent InfinityLab Companion G7108AA

The Agilent InfinityLab Companion gives you complete control, system
monitoring, signal plotting, and diagnostic capabilities for a wide range of LC
system modules.
The instrument control solution is available as full package including all hardware
and accessories, but can also be used on your own mobile devices like tablets,
mobile phones and other electronic equipment.
Combining the conveniences of the Agilent Instant Pilot features with
state-of-the-art mobile technology, the Agilent InfinityLab Companion gives you
maximum flexibility and ease of use to control and monitor your LC system
modules.
Features:
• Complete local control and monitoring of Agilent Infinity II LC modules
• Excellent usability and ease of use through a user interface specifically
tailored for mobile devices - simple, intuitive touch-enabled, and visual
controllable.
• High flexibility through a modern “Bring your own device” approach.
Connection between LC module and mobile device either wireless via Wi-Fi or
wired over USB cable (with full package).
• Convenient, ergonomic operation either handheld or attached to a module at
the stack with newly developed, secure tablet holder (included in the full
package).
• Preconfigured tablet with all required software already installed (included in
the full package).
• Centerpiece of the solution is a USB dongle that activates the complete
intelligence of the InfinityLab Companion on the instrument stack.
The InfinityLab Companion provides:
• fast and direct control in front of the instrument
• a clear overview of the system status
• control functionalities
• access to method parameters and sequences
• a logbook showing events from the modules
• diagnostic tests


Preparing the Multisampler 126
Recommended Mats and Vials 127
Configure Well Plate Types 130
Capillary Coding Guide 133
Syntax for Capillary Description 133
At-a-Glance Color-Coding Keys 134
Installing Capillaries 135
Flow Connections to the Washport (Standard) 139
Flow Connections to the Washport (Dual-Needle) 141
Installing the Bypass Capillary (Dual Needle) 143
Flow Connections to the Washport (Multiwash) 146
Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab CDS ChemStation
Edition 148
Control Settings 150
Method Parameter Settings 152
Module Configuration View for Single Needle 154
Edition 155
Instrument Configuration View for Dual Needle 159
Method Setup 164
Sequence Parameters 168
This chapter explains the operational parameters of the module.


WAR N IN G
risks.
procedures (for example by wearing goggles, safety gloves and protective
clothing) as described in the material handling and safety data sheet
supplied by the vendor, and follow good laboratory practice.
 Do not use solvents with an auto-ignition temperature below 200 °C
(392 °F). Do not use solvents with a boiling point below 56 °C (133 °F).
 Avoid high vapor concentrations. Keep the solvent temperature at least
40 °C (72 °F) below the boiling point of the solvent used. This includes the
solvent temperature in the sample compartment. For the solvents methanol
and ethanol keep the solvent temperature at least 25 °C (45 °F) below the
boiling point.
 Do not use solvents of ignition Class IIC according IEC 60079-20-1 (for
example, carbon disulfide).
 Reduce the volume of substances to the minimum required for the analysis.
 Never exceed the maximum permissible volume of solvents (8 L) in the
solvent cabinet. Do not use bottles that exceed the maximum permissible
volume as specified in the usage guideline for solvent cabinet.
 Ground the waste container.
 Regularly check the filling level of the waste container. The residual free
volume in the waste container must be large enough to collect the waste
liquid.
 To achieve maximal safety, regularly check the tubing for correct
installation.
For details, see the usage guideline for the solvent cabinet. A printed copy of the
NOTE guideline has been shipped with the solvent cabinet, electronic copies are
available in the Agilent Information Center or via the Internet.
For details on correct installation, see separate installation documentation.

Preparing the Multisampler
Preparing the Multisampler
For best performance of the Multisampler

• When using the Multisampler in a system with a vacuum degassing unit,
shortly degas your samples before using them in the Multisampler.
• Filter samples before use in an InfinityLab LC Series system. Use 1290 Infinity
II inline filter ( 0.3 µm) (5067-6189) for inline filtering.
This inline filter contains stainless steel and is not indicated for use in bio-inert or
NOTE bio-compatible systems.
• When using buffer solutions, flush the system with water before switching it
off.
• Check the Multisampler plungers for scratches, grooves, and dents when
changing the piston seal. Damaged plungers cause micro leaks and will
decrease the lifetime of the seal.
• Solvent Information: Observe recommendations on the use of solvents, see
“Solvent Information” on page 109.
• Priming and purging the system: When the solvents have been exchanged or
the system has been turned off for a certain time (for example, overnight)
oxygen will re-diffuse into the solvent channel. Therefore priming and purging
of the system is required before starting an application.
Table 19 Choice of Priming Solvents for Different Purposes
Activity Solvent Comments
After an installation Isopropanol Best solvent to flush air out of

the system
When switching between Isopropanol Best solvent to flush air out of

reverse phase and normal the system
phase (both times)
After an installation Ethanol or methanol Alternative to isopropanol (sec-

ond choice) if no isopropanol is
available
To clean the system when Bidistilled water Best solvent to re-dissolve buf-
using buffers fer crystals
After a solvent change Bidistilled water Best solvent to re-dissolve buf-

fer crystals

Recommended Mats and Vials
Table 20 Recommended plates and closing mats
Description (Part Number) Rows Columns Plate Volume Package Closing mat
height (L) compatibility
(mm)
384Agilent (5042-1388) 16 24 14.4 80 30
384Corning (No Agilent PN) 16 24 14.4 80
384Nunc (No Agilent PN) 16 24 14.4 80
96 well plate 0.5 ml, PP (pack of 10) 8 12 14.3 500 10 1

(5042-1386) 120 1
96 well plate 0.5 ml, PP (pack of 120)
(5042-1385)
96Agilent conical (5042-8502) 8 12 17.3 150 25 1
96CappedAgilent (5065-4402) 8 12 47.1 300 1 1
96Corning (No Agilent PN) 8 12 14.3 300
96CorningV (No Agilent PN) 8 12 14.3 300
96DeepAgilent31mm (5042-6454) 8 12 31.5 1000 50 1
96DeepNunc31mm (No Agilent PN) 8 12 31,5 1000
96DeepRitter41mm (No Agilent PN) 8 12 41.2 800
96Greiner (No Agilent PN) 8 12 14.3 300
96GreinerV (No Agilent PN) 8 12 14.3 250
96Nunc (No Agilent PN) 8 12 14.3 400
96 Well plate, square wells, U shape, PP 8 12 41 2200 30 2

(5043-9300)
96 Well plate, round wells, U shape, PP 8 12 45 2000 30 3

(5043-9302)

(5043-9305)

(5043-9308)

Table 20 Recommended plates and closing mats
Description (Part Number) Rows Columns Plate Volume Package Closing mat
height (L) compatibility
(mm)

(5043-9309)

(5043-9310)

(5043-9311)
96 Well plate, round wells, V shape, PP 8 12 14 330 25 4

(5043-9312)

(5043-9313)

(5043-9314)
384 Well plate, square wells, V shape, PP 16 24 22 190 25 4

(5043-9315)
1 Closing mat for all 96 Agilent plates (5042-1389)

2 Mat 96 wells, square, pierceable, silicone 50/pk (5043-9319)
3 Mat 96 wells, round, pierceable, silicone 50/pk (5043-9317), Mat 96 wells, round, piercable, silicone 100/pk (5043-9318)
4 Mat 384 wells, square, pierceable, silicone 50/pk (5043-9320)

Table 21 Recommended vial plates
Description (part number) Rows Columns Plate Volume Package

height (µL)
(mm)
Vial plate for 54 x 2 mL vials (6/pk) (G2255-68700) 6 9 36 2000 6
Vial plate 40 x 2 mL vials (5023-2471) 5 8 43 2000 1
Vial plate for 15 x 6 mL vials (1/pk) (5022-6539) 3 5 42 6000 1

only compatible with 3H drawers
Vial plate for 27 Eppendorf tubes (1/pk) (5022-6538) 3 9 40 500 – 200 1

0
For good chromatographic results the maximum filling should not exceed 3/4 of
NOTE the total volume of the vial.
Agilent Technologies recommends to use preslit septa.

NOTE
Bottom sensing is a feature to detect the depth of vials or plates via the software.
NOTE
If the bottom sensing feature is used, the bottom of the plates and vials must
resist the needle. Make sure that the material supports this feature. Inserts with
flexible support should not be used.
For the Needle height position, an offset of 0 equates to 2 mm above the

NOTE wellplate bottom.
In case of custom-made wellplates or vials, please keep in mind the physical

NOTE limitations of each drawer.
The maximum total height allowed (including sample container and vial caps, if
present) is:
• 1H: 19 mm
• 2H: 45 mm
• 3H: 50 mm
Adhesive foils are not recommended to seal wellplates. Alternatively, plates can
NOTE be sealed with a Pierceable aluminium foil (06644-001).

Configure Well Plate Types
If the plate you are using is not found on the “Recommended Mats and Vials” on
page 127 you may configure a custom plate. Measure the exact dimensions of
the plate as marked below and enter the values in the plate configuration table of
the chromatographic data system.
column
F I
G
E A B row
C
D
Figure 26 Well Plate Dimensions (straight)

F I
G
E A B H
C
D
Figure 27 Well Plate Dimensions (staggered)

Table 22 Well Plate Dimensions
Location Description Definition Limits
Rows Number of rows on the plate up to 16
Columns Number of columns on the plate up to 24
Volume Volume (in µI) of a sample vessel
A Row distance Distance (in mm) between the center

of two rows
B Column distance Distance (in mm) between the center

of two columns
C Plate length X size (in mm) at the bottom of the 127.75+/- 0.25 mm
plate (SBS Standard)
D Plate width Y size (in mm) at the bottom of the 85.50+/-0.25 mm (SBS
plate Standard)
E Plate height Size (in mm) from the bottom to the up to 47 mm

top of the plate
F Row offset Distance (in mm) from the back

edge (bottom) to the center of the
first hole (A1)
G Column offset Distance (in mm) from the left edge

(bottom) to the center of the first
hole (A1)
H Column shift Offset (in mm) to Y when the rows

are not straight but staggered
l Well diameter Diameter (in mm) of the well at least 4 mm
J WeIl depth Distance (in mm) from the top of the up to 45 mm

plate to the bottom of the well
The distances need to be measured with high precision. It is recommended to

NOTE use calipers.

Capillary Coding Guide
Syntax for Capillary Description

The tables below are your guide to identifying the proper specifications for your
capillary. On all capillaries, dimensions are noted in id (mm), length (mm) and,
where applicable, volume (µL). When you receive your capillary, these
abbreviations are printed on the packaging.
Using the guide: This fitting is coded as SPF, for Swagelok, PEEK, Fingertight.
Table 23 Capillary coding guide
Type Material Fitting left/fitting right

The type gives some indication on the pri- The material indicates which raw The fitting left/right indicate which
mary function, like a loop or a connection material is used. fitting is used on both ends of the
capillary. capillary.
Key Description Key Description Key Description
Capillary Connection capillaries SS Stainless steel W Swagelok + 0.8 mm Port id

Loop Loop capillaries Ti Titanium S Swagelok + 1.6 mm Port id
Seat Autosampler needle seats PK PEEK M Metric M4 + 0.8 mm Port id
Tube Tubing FS/PK PEEK-coated fused silica1 E Metric M3 + 1.6 mm Port id
Heat Heat exchanger PK/SS Stainless steel-coated U Swagelok union

exchanger PEEK2
PFFE PTFE L Long
FS Fused silica X Extra long
MP35N Nickel-cobalt-chro- H Long head

mium-molybdenium alloy
G Small head SW 4
N Small head SW 5
F Finger-tight
V 1200 bar
B Bio
P PEEK
I Intermediate
1 Fused silica in contact with solvent

2 Stainless steel-coated PEEK

At-a-Glance Color-Coding Keys

The color of your capillary will help you quickly identify the capillary id.
Table 24 Color-coding key for Agilent capillary tubing
Internal diameter in Color code

mm
0.015 Orange
0.025 Yellow
0.05 Beige
0.075 Black
0.075 MP35N Black with orange

stripe
0.1 Purple
0.12 Red
0.12 MP35N Red with orange stripe
0.17 Green
0.17 MP35N Green with orange

stripe
0.20/0.25 Blue
0.20/0.25 MP35N Blue with orange stripe
0.3 Grey
0.50 Bone White
As you move to smaller-volume, high efficiency columns, you’ll want to use

HINT narrow id tubing, as opposed to the wider id tubing used for conventional HPLC
instruments

Installing Capillaries
Capillaries and connections depend on which system is installed.

Table 25 Capillary connections for 1260 Infinity II systems
p/n From To
Bottle Head Assembly (G7120-60007) Solvent Bottle Infinity II Pump
Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1246) Pump Sampler
Capillary, ST, 0.17 mm x 900 mm SI/SX (5500-1217) Pump Vialsampler with ICC
Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1246) Multisampler MCT Valve/Heat Exchanger
Capillary, ST, 0.17 mm x 400 mm SL/SL (5500-1252) Vialsampler MCT Valve/Heat Exchanger
Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 105 mm SL/SL (5500-1240) Vialsampler ICC Heat Exchanger
Capillary, ST, 0.17 mm x 120 mm SL/SL, long socket ICC Heat Exchanger Column
(5500-1250)
InfinityLab Quick Turn Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 105 mm, long MCT Heat Exchanger Column
socket (5500-1193)
InfinityLab Quick Turn Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 280 mm, long Column/MCT Valve Detector
socket (5500-1191)
Waste accessory kit (5062-8535) VWD Waste
Tube PTFE 0.7 mm x 5 m, 1.6 mm od (5062-2462) DAD/FLD Waste
Analytical tubing kit 0.25 mm i.d. PTFE-ESD (G5664-68712) Detector Fraction Collector

Table 26 Capillary connections for 1290 Infinity II systems
p/n From To
Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 400 mm SI/SI (5500-1245) Pump Sampler
Capillary, ST, 0.17 mm x 900 mm SI/SX (5500-1217) Pump Vialsampler with ICC
Capillary ST, 0.12 mm x 500 mm SL/S (5500-1157) Multisampler MCT Valve/Heat Exchanger
Capillary ST 0.12 mmX 400 mm SL/SL (5500-1251) Vialsampler MCT Valve/Heat Exchanger
Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 105 mm SL/SL (5500-1238) Vialsampler ICC Heat Exchanger
Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 120 mm SL/SL, long socket ICC Heat Exchanger Column
(5500-1249)
Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 105 mm SL/ (5500-1201) MCT Heat Exchanger Column
InfinityLab Quick Turn Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 280 mm, long Column/MCT Valve Detector
socket (5500-1191)
Table 27 Capillary connections for 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert LC
p/n From To
Capillary Ti 0.17 mm x 500 mm, SL/SLV (5500-1264) Pump Multisampler
Capillary PK/ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm, RLO/RLO (Bio-inert) Multisampler MCT

(G5667-81005)
ZDV union (Bio-inert) (5067-4741) Capillary Bio-inert Heat Exchanger
Quick Connect Heat Exchanger Bio-inert (G7116-60041)
Capillary Kit Flow Cells BIO includes Capillary PK 0.18 mm x Column/MCT Valve Detector
1.5 m and PEEK Fittings 10/PK (p/n 5063-6591)
(G5615-68755)

Table 28 Capillary connections for 1290 Infinity II Bio LC
p/n From To
Capillary MP35N 0.17 mm x 500 mm, SI/SI (5500-1419) Pump Multisampler
Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 500 mm SI/SI (5500-1279) Multisampler MCT
Quick Connect Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 105 mm MCT Heat Exchanger Column
(5500-1578)
Quick Turn Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 280 mm (5500-1596) Column/MCT Valve Detector
For correct installation of capillary connections it's important to choose the

correct fittings, see “Syntax for Capillary Description” on page 133.
1 Select a nut that is long enough for the fitting you'll be 2 Slide the nut over the end of the tubing or capillary.
using.

3 Carefully slide the ferrule components on after the nut 4 Use a column or injection valve to gently tighten the fit-
and then finger-tighten the assembly while ensuring ting which forces the ferrule to seat onto the tubing or
that the tubing is completely seated in the bottom of the capillary.
end fitting.
NOTE
Don't overtighten. Overtightening will shorten the lifetime of
the fitting.
5 Loosen the nut and verify that the ferrule is correctly
positioned on the tubing or capillary.
The first time that the swagelock fitting is used on a column or an injection valve,
NOTE the position of the ferrule is permanently set. If changing from a column or an
injection valve to another, the fitting may leak or decrease the quality of the
separation by contributing to band broadening.

Flow Connections to the Washport (Standard)
Preparations Module is installed in the system.

Use an appropriate solvent based on the sample and mobile phase chemistries.
The composition of the wash solvent should be the most solubilizing compatible solvent (your stron-
gest diluent). Selecting the wash solvent is part of the method development.
A mixture of 50 % up to 100 % organic solvent in distilled water is a good choice for many applica-
tions.
The silicone waste drainage is suitable for the most common wash solvents. For
NOTE critical wash solvents, it may be necessary to replace the silicone tube with a PE
tube (Tubing, PE, 1.5 m (5042-9974))
1 Place a needle wash solvent reservoir into the solvent cabinet.

2 Connect the a Bottle Head Assembly to the solvent reservoir and close the
bottle.
3 Guide the tube of the Needle Wash Bottle Head Assembly through the cover
opening and connect it to the peristaltic pump (use a TEFZEL union
0100-1846 and the FEP tubing 0890-1760 from the Standard Tubing kit).
4 Route the drainage of the washport outlet to the waste container.
5 Prime or auto clean the wash solvent tubings.
6 Check setting up the autosampler with OpenLAB Chemstation.
Flow Connections to the Multisampler (Standard)

from solvent bottle
Peristaltic pump
to washport
Sample loop flex
Metering device
1
from pump (port 1) 2
to column (port 6) 6
plastic blank nut 3
5 Injection valve
(port 3)
4
to waste (port 4)
to needle seat
(port 5)
Figure 28 Capillary connections (Standard)

Flow Connections to the Washport (Dual-Needle)
Flow Connections to the Washport

(Dual-Needle)

tions.
tube (Tubing, PE, 1.5 m (5042-9974))
1 Place a needle wash solvent reservoir into the solvent cabinet.

2 Connect the a Bottle Head Assembly to the solvent reservoir and close the
bottle.
3 Guide the tube of the Needle Wash Bottle Head Assembly through the cover
opening and connect it to the peristaltic pump (use a TEFZEL union
0100-1846 and the FEP tubing 0890-1760 from the Standard Tubing kit).
Flow Connections to the Multisampler (Dual-Needle)

Flow Connections to the Washport (Dual-Needle)
from solvent bottle
Peristaltic pump
to washport
2 1
from pump
3 6 Peripheral valve
5
4
metering device
Sample loop left needle
2 1
3
Sample loop right needle
8 Injection valve
6 7
to column
5
4
to left needle seat
to right needle seat
Figure 29 Capillary connections (Dual-Needle)

Installing the Bypass Capillary (Dual Needle)
When When the dual-needle configuration has to be used in single-path mode. The bypass capillary allows
the configuration of a minimized injection path to reduce flush times. In this case, the needle where
the bypass is installed is no longer available for injection.

8710-0510 Open-end wrench 1/4 — 5/16 inch

5500-1238 Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 105 mm SL/SL
Preparations Finish any pending acquisition job and return any plate on the workspace back to the hotel. Remove
the Sample Loop-Flex that will be replaced by the bypass capillary. Store the unused sample loop in a
safe place.

WAR N IN G
 Do not open the safety lock of the needle assembly
 Wear safety goggles, when removing the needle assembly.
Mismatching sample loop configuration

C AU T I O N
Damage to the system
 Make sure, that the sample loop configuration matches to the hardware
installed.
If you have changed the bypass capillary, verify that the correct sample loop and
NOTE bypass capillary is configured in the CDS (see “Setting up the Autosampler with
Agilent OpenLab CDS ChemStation Edition” on page 148).
For details on the setup of the dual-needle system, see “Modify Capillaries” on
NOTE page 158.

1 Install the bypass capillary to the left or right flow path.
Figure 30 The right bypass capillary is installed
Either connect the bypass capillary from port 1 to port 5 in the left flow path or
NOTE connect the bypass capillary from port 3 to port 7 for the right flow path.

2 To set up the bypass capillary in the CDS, right-click into the active area, then
select Modify > Capillaries from the context menu.
3 Select Right or Left from the Bypass capillary dropdown menu, depending on
which flow path you want to bypass.
In the active area, you will see that one syringe icon is greyed out, indicating
that only one flow path is active. Click Assign.

Flow Connections to the Washport (Multiwash)

tions.
tube (Tubing, PE, 1.5 m (5042-9974))
1 Place solvent reservoirs for needle wash and needle seat flushing into the
solvent cabinet.
2 Connect the Bottle Head Assemblies to the solvent reservoirs and close the
bottles.
3 Guide the tubes of the Wash Bottle Head Assemblies through the cover
opening and connect it to the ports S1, S2, and S3 of the solvent selection
valve.
Flow Connections to the Multisampler (Multiwash)

Solvents on cabinet
to washport
SSV/piezo pump
to flush pump
Flush pump
to column (port 6)
Sample loop flex
to washport/
Metering device
needle seat
(port 4)
to metering device
(port 2) 1
2 6
Injection valve
Plastic blank nut 3
(port 3) 5
to needle seat 4
(port 5)
from pump (port 1)
Figure 31 Capillary connections (Multiwash)

Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab CDS ChemStation Edition
Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent

OpenLab CDS ChemStation Edition
The setup of the Multisampler is shown with the Agilent OpenLab CDS
ChemStation Edition C.01.06. Depending on the controller (e.g. Local Controller,
OpenLab CDS EZChrom Edition, Masshunter) the screens look different.
This section describes the autosampler settings only. For information on Agilent
NOTE OpenLab CDS ChemStation Edition or other InfinityLab LC Series modules refer
to the corresponding documentation.
Figure 32 ChemStation Method and Run Control
After successful load of the OpenLab CDS ChemStation Edition, you should see
the module as an active item in the graphical user interface (GUI).

Table 29 The Autosampler User Interface
Within the Multisampler user interface, there are active areas. If you
move the mouse cursor across the icons (tray, EMF button), the cur-
sor will change and you may click on the icon to
1 Turn on/off the autosampler
2 Configure the sample hotel
3 Get the status of the EMF (Early Maintenance Feature)
4 Sample Cooler/Thermostat Temperatur
Current instrument information on:
• Injection volume
• Sample location
A right-click into the Active Area will open a menu to

• Show the Control User Interface (special module settings)
• Show the Method User interface (same as via menu Instrument >
Set up Instrument Method > Setup G7167B)
• Injector Program
When you activate a pretreatment/injector program, it replaces
the standard injection cycle.
• Identify Device
• Home All
• Switch on Tray Illumination
• Auto Clean
• Prime
• Modify
• Drawer Configuration
Changing the load capacity of the Sample Hotel
• Capillaries
Changing Sample Loop, Needle Seat, and bypass capillary
configuration
• Reference Vial Rack
• Assign Wellplates
Wellplate Configuration (same as click on the Tray icon)
NOTE
For customizing a wellplate in the CDS, click on Define Sample
Containers in the instrument configuration view.

Table 29 The Autosampler User Interface
Module Status shows Run / Ready / Error state and “Not Ready text”
or “Error text”
• Error (Red)
• Not ready (yellow)
• Ready (green)
• Pre run, Post run (purple)
• Run (blue)
• Idle (green)
• Offline (dark gray)
• Standby (light gray)
EMF Status shows Run / Ready / Error state and “Not Ready text” or
“Error text”
• Offline (gray)
• Ok
No Maintenance required (green)
• EMF warning. Maintenance might be required (yellow)
• EMF warning. Maintenance required (red)
The multisampler configuration is done in the module dashboard context menu,

NOTE not in the instrument configuration.
Control Settings
The control settings are available via right click on the active area of the grafical
user interface, see “Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab CDS
ChemStation Edition” on page 148.

Table 30 Control settings
The Sampler control parameters are in the following sections:

• Missing Vial
Mark the Ignore missing vial check box to specify that, if a vial is
missing, the injector ignores it and continues with a 6-second
dummy run. The message "Missing vial <x>" is logged, and the
system continues with the next injection.
• Illumination
Toggles the illumination of the sample area, On or Off.
• At Power On
The section is available when a cooler/thermostat is installed and
configured. Mark the Turn on Thermostat check box to specify
that the cooler/thermostat is switched on automatically when the
instrument is switched on.
• Thermostat
The section is available when a cooler/thermostat is installed and
configured and the Constant temperature mode is selected.
Select On to switch on the cooler/thermostat. Specify the required
temperature in the adjacent field. The specified temperature must
be at least 5 °C below ambient for proper temperature control.
Select Off to switch off the cooler/thermostat.
• Automatic Turn On
You can set a date and time at which the cooler/thermostat
switches on automatically.
• Pump connected to Sampler
Use this section to specify the pump that is used with the Vial-
sampler. If more than one pump is configured, display the
drop-down list and select the appropriate pump from the list.
• Clear Workspace
Immediately Returns the sample container on the workspace to
its position in the sample hotel immediately after the injection has
Figure 33 Control settings been completed. This allows you to quickly retrieve the sample
container for further processing.
At End of Analysis Returns the sample container on the work-
space to its position in the sample hotel after the current run or
sequence/worklist has been completed. This is the default set-
ting.
Never Leaves the sample container on the workspace until a dif-
ferent sample container is required to replace it.
• Enable Analysis
This feature requires LC & CE Drivers A.02.19 or newer and is only
available for the Sample Thermostat. With this function, you can
specify if the analyses should start With any temperature or only
when the Temperature is within ± 2 °C range of the setpoint tem-
perature.
NOTE
The Enable Analysis section is disabled when Not controlled is
selected in the Temperature section.
NOTE
For additional help and support, highlight the desired area and press the F1 key. A
NOTE help screen will open with additional information and documentation about the
topic.

Method Parameter Settings

These settings are available via Menu > Instrument > Set up Instrument Method
Multisampler or via right click on the Active area.
Figure 34 Method parameter settings
Usually default draw offset = 0 equates to 2 mm above the wellplate bottom.

NOTE
For additional help and support. Highlight the desired cell and press the F1 key. A
NOTE help screen will open with additional information and documentation about the
topic.

Injection Mode/ Needle Wash

The settable Injection volume is depending on what kind of
configuration is installed. Default configuration 0.1 – 20 µL.
It is possible to select between using the Standard Wash or
Standard Wash off. Using needle wash is one option to
obtain minimum carryover.
The Injection cleaning section allows you to select between

the Standard Wash option and the Multi-wash option. With
the Standard Wash (default configuration) you can choose
between two modes the Flush port or Wash Vial. If the
Multi-Wash option is installed (additional hardware is
required) you can use Needle Wash and Seat Back Flush
together to obtain the lowest carryover.
Multi-wash (Multisampler Injection Cleaning)

The Multi-wash table allows you to specify up to four steps
that will be used to clean the system.
The Start Cond. step is not always executed. Therefore it is
recommend to check the box to ensure that, at the end of
the cleaning procedure, the flow path of the sampler is filled
with the starting solvent conditions for the next sample.
For each cleaning step, Click the Solvent down arrow and
select the solvent to use (S1, S2, S3) or switch the step Off.
Specify a duration (in seconds) in the Time [s] field.
Mark the check boxes for Seat Back Flush and/or Needle
Wash to include these actions. If both are selected, they are
carried out simultaneously; if neither is selected, the step is
ignored (equivalent to selecting Off). Add a comment in the
Comment column, if necessary.
Stoptime/Posttime
A Multisampler Stoptime can be set. For equilibration of the
Multisampler a Posttime can be set.
It takes approximatly 30 s to fully exchange one solvent for another in the

NOTE flushport. To flush and exchange the solvent in the needle seat it takes 18 s.
Additionally it is strong recommended to use Auto-Clean function to flush the
module regularly with all installed solvents.

Module Configuration View for Single Needle

The settings are available via menu Instrument > Instrument Configuration >
Multisampler Configuration.
• Device name: based on the

module.
• Type ID: based on the
module (product number).
Some modules may allow
changing the type based
on hardware/firmware.
This results in a change of
features and functions.
• Serial number: based on
the module.
• Firmware revision: based
on the module.
• Options: lists installed
options.
Figure 35 Configuration view (single needle)
Changes in the sampler configuration can only be done in the online view of the
NOTE CDS system, see Table 29 on page 149.

Edition
Setting up the Dual Needle System with Agilent

OpenLAB CDS ChemStation Edition
A right-click into the Active Area will open a menu to

• Show the Control User Interface (special module settings)
• Show the Method User interface (same as via menu Instrument > Set up
Instrument Method > Setup G7167B)
• Injector Program
When you activate a pretreatment/injector program, it replaces the standard
injection cycle.
• Identify Device
• Home All
• Reset Injector
• Switch to Mainpass (main path) Left (needle loop left is connected to the pump
device)
• Switch to Mainpass (main path) Right (needle loop right is connected to the
pump device)
• Switch on Tray Illumination

Edition
• Auto-clean
• Prime Solvents
• Start Purge:
Manual start of the purge routine, duration defined by hydraulic setup.
See “Purge” on page 157 for further information on purge.
• Modify
• Drawer Configuration: Changing the load capacity of the Sample Hotel
• Capillaries Setup: for the sample loops, needle seat, and bypass capillaries
for dual needle option
• Reference Vial Bar
• Assign Wellplates
Wellplate Configuration (same as click on the Tray icon)
For customizing a wellplate in the CDS, click on Define Sample Containers in the
NOTE instrument configuration view.

Edition
Purge
Typical time for purge:
• 1290 Binary pump, 2x 20 µL setup, flow rate: 0.5 mL/min ~ 125 s
• 1290 Binary pump, 2x 20 µL setup, flow rate: 1.0 mL/min ~ 85 s
Other configurations (especially large volume setups) will last longer.
In order to get information about remaining purge time, expand the window in the
user interface:
The start of the pump or changes in solvent composition trigger the purge
NOTE routine of the multisampler. The purge routine flushes the hydraulic setup of the
multisampler with fresh mobile phase (for example metering device, sample
loops, and needles). This ensures cleanness of the flowpath.
For pumps with a manual purge valve, it is mandatory to start the purge routine
NOTE before a run or sequence. This will guarantee that the complete flow path of the
dual needle setup is flushed with fresh mobile phase.
The only way to speed up the purge routine is to increase flow rate. Best
NOTE practices is to write a purge method in the sequence table. The purge method
includes a column switching valve that switches at high flow rate into the waste
position.

Edition
Modify Capillaries
Figure 36 Capillary Setup for the Multisampler
To avoid damage of the system, the configuration of the dual-needle system

NOTE must match to the installed hardware, especially the sample loops.
Only the listed capillary PN 5500-1238 can be used as bypass capillary (either left
NOTE or right).

Edition
Instrument Configuration View for Dual Needle
Figure 37 Configuration view for alternating dual needle with two 20 µL Sample Loops

Edition
Figure 38 Configuration view for dual needle with non-identical flow paths (e.g a 20 µL and a
500 µL Sample Loop)
In this view it is not possible to change the online configuration of the sample
NOTE loops or the seat capillaries.
Shows the currently installed devices and status.

Edition
Table 31 Instrument configuration view for dual needle
Communication • Device name: Multisampler

• Type ID: G7167A/B
• Serial number: DEBAR00101
• Firmware revision: D.06.75
• Connection settings: LAN connection or hostname
Options Metering: G4267-60043 100 µL Analytical Head
NOTE
For dual needle only the 100 µL metering device is available.
For single needle you can use 40 µL, 100 µL or 900 µL metering devices
Left Needle installed This check box is marked to indicate that your system is equipped with a
dual-needle option. When the check box is marked, the Left Needle section
is enabled.
NOTE
If the Left Needle parameters are equivalent to the Right Needle parameters,
then Alternating Needle Usage is possible, which increases sampling effi-
ciency.
NOTE
If dual-needle option is installed, the system will use multi-load instead of
multi-draw for larger sample volumes. For multi-wash and an installed
dual-needle option, multi-draw is not available.
Left Needle This section is enabled only when the Left Needle installed check box is
marked.
Loop Shows the currently installed loop capillary.
NOTE
It is mandatory that the configuration of the dual needle system, especially
sample loops, match to the installed hardware to avoid damage to the sys-
tem.
Seat Shows the currently installed seat capillary.
Right Needle This section is always enabled.

Edition
Loop Shows the currently installed loop capillary.
NOTE
For the dual needle setup, only the correct dual needle sample loops must
be configured and used, for instance Sample Loop 20 µL right Dual needle
(G4267-60311). These sample loops are manufactured especially for
dual-needle systems.
Seat Shows the currently installed seat capillary.

The needle seat capillary volume is used for the Automatic Delay Volume
Reduction option and ISET.
Thermostat installed This check box is marked to show that a sample cooler or sample thermo-
stat is installed.
Mode Select Constant temperature mode to set the temperature using the Thermo-
stat section of the Multisampler Control parameters. Use this mode to store
samples at a constant temperature across multiple runs. This is the default
mode, which is recommended in most cases.
Select Variable temperature mode to set the temperature using the Thermo-
stat section of the Advanced Method Setup parameters. In this mode, the
temperature can be varied from run to run.
Multi-wash installed This check box is marked to show that the multi-wash option is installed,
and the Multi-wash option in the Needle Wash section of the Method param-
eters is available (Not available for dual-needle).
Reference vial rack Click the down-arrow and select the reference vial rack that is installed in
your multisampler from the drop-down list.

Edition
Bypass capillary Click the down arrow and select where the bypass capillary is installed (if
any).
When installed, the bypass capillary allows the configuration of a minimized
injection path to reduce flush times and allows the dual-needle configura-
tion to be used in single-path mode. In this case, the needle where the
bypass is installed is no longer available for injection.
NOTE
Bypass capillary either installed left or right: only the listed capillary (p/n
5500-1238) can be used as bypass capillary.
Define Sample Contain- Displays the Define and edit Wellplates configuration dialog box, which con-
ers tains a list of standard preconfigured wellplates plus any custom wellplates
that have been added.
For the dual needle setup, only the correct hardware must be configured and
NOTE used, for instance the Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 105 mm SL/SL (5500-1238) or
Sample Loop 20 µL right Dual needle (G4267-60311).

Edition
Method Setup
Figure 39 Method setup screen for Dual Needle option

Edition
Table 32 Method setup parameters (DN)
Injection The Injection section allows you to specify the Injection volume and to select
the needle
Needle selection
• Alternating Needle: Needles will be toggled (only possible if the both

flowpaths of are configured identically)
• Right Needle: only the right needle will be used
• Left Needle: only the left needle will be used
Needle Wash The needle is washed in accordance with the parameters set up in the Stan-
dard Wash section of the Injection Path Cleaning section of the Method.
Stoptime The Stoptime enables you to set the time that the analysis stops.
Limits: 0.01 to 99999 min or As Pump/No Limit.
Posttime You can set the Posttime so that your Multisampler remains in a post-run
state during the Posttime to delay the start of the next analysis.
A Posttime period can be used to allow your column to equilibrate after
changes in solvent composition (for example after gradient elution).
Limits: 0.01 to 99999 min or Off (0.0 min).
Sampling Speed • Draw Speed: determines the rate at which the plunger draws sample
from the vial. Set the speed to an appropriate value for your sample. For
viscous samples, use a slow Draw Speed.
• Eject Speed: determines the rate at which the plunger ejects sample
from the metering device. If you are injecting large volumes of sample,
setting a high Eject Speed will shorten the time needed for an injection
cycle. For viscous samples, use a slow Eject Speed.
• Wait Time After Draw: this time ensures that the temporary vacuum,
which originates from the drawing of liquid from the sample vial, dissi-
pates. The needle first stays on the seat for the specified time, then
after drawing sample from the vial remains there for the specified time.

Edition
Table 32 Method setup parameters (DN)
Needle Height Position • Offset: this is a vertical offset that enables you to position the needle a
specific distance (in mm) away from its standard position. The Offset
function is useful when analyzing very small sample volumes, or when
only a specific part of the sample is required, for example, the top layer.
Usually default draw offset = 0 equates to 2 mm above the wellplate
bottom.
• Use Vial/Well Bottom Sensing: this feature allows the needle to detect
non-uniform well bottoms, and adjusts the depth of the needle position
to 2 mm (default value) above the detected bottom of the vial or well.
You can use Vial/Well Bottom Sensing in combination with the Offset to
customize the draw position of the needle.To turn on Vial/Well Bottom
Sensing, mark the check box. The default setting is cleared. You may
want to turn off Vial/Well Bottom Sensing to increase speed of injection,
or to avoid the needle touching the bottom of the well if a sample pre-
cipitate could clog it.
Smart Overlap • Enable Smart Overlap: Overlapped injection provides faster throughput
of samples by allowing the preparation of the next injection while the
current injection is in the mainpass (main path).
This section is available only for a dual-needle Multisampler with identi-
cal left and right flow paths (Seat capillary and Loop capillary), and Alter-
nating Needle selected in the Injection section of the method setup.
• After Period of Time: specifies the time (in minutes) that the Multisam-
pler waits after injection of a sample before taking up and injecting the
next sample.
NOTE
It is important to calculate the time close to the start point of the next
run to avoid waiting time with filled sample loop.

Edition
High Throughput
This section is available only for a dual-needle Multisampler with different

NOTE seat-capillary and loop-capillary volumes, and either Right Needle or Left Needle
selected in the Injection section of the method setup.
Table 33 High throughput
Sample Flush-Out Fac- The Sample Flush-Out Factor ensures that the sample is thoroughly flushed
tor out of the sample loop and needle after switching into the mainpass (main
path). The factor is part of the flush-out volume formula, which is calculated
by the Multisampler firmware.
The volume is calculated as: factor x (injection volume + seat capillary vol-
ume + valve volume).
The Sample Flush-Out Factor is preset to 5.0 at the factory.
The preset Sample Flush-Out Factor is correct for most methods. However,
for unusually viscous samples, you should increase the Sample Flush-Out
Factor to obtain the desired degree of flushing in order to prevent sample
carryover.
Injection Valve to This parameter is used to switch the flow from the injector from mainpass
Bypass for Delay Vol- (main path) to bypass after injection has taken place. This reduces the delay
ume Reduction volume for low volume techniques. You can specify the point during the
analyses when the valve switches to bypass. This is done by setting the
Sample Flush-out Factor.
Enable Overlapped Overlapped injection provides faster throughput of samples by allowing the
Injection preparation of the next sample during analysis of the injected sample.

Edition
Sequence Parameters
Not ready timeout: the time in minutes has to be longer than the purge routine
lasts - otherwise the run will be aborted before start.

Delay Volume and Extra-Column Volume 170

Delay Volume 170
How to Configure the Optimum Delay Volume 171
How to Achieve Higher Injection Volumes 175
How to Achieve High Throughput 177
How to Achieve Higher Resolution 178
How to Achieve Higher Sensitivity 181
How to Achieve Lowest Carry Over 182
This chapter gives hints on how to optimize the performance or use additional
devices.

Delay Volume and Extra-Column Volume
Delay Volume and Extra-Column Volume
The delay volume is defined as the system volume between the point of mixing in
the pump and the front of the column.
The extra-column volume is defined as the volume between the injection point
and the detection point, excluding the volume in the column.
Delay Volume
In gradient separations, this volume causes a delay between the mixture
changing in the pump and that change reaching the column. The delay depends
on the flow rate and the delay volume of the system. In effect, this means that in
every HPLC system there is an additional isocratic segment in the gradient profile
at the start of every run. Usually the gradient profile is reported in terms of the
mixture settings at the pump and the delay volume is not quoted even though
this will have an effect on the chromatography. This effect becomes more
significant at low flow rates and small column volumes and can have a large
impact on the transferability of gradient methods. It is important, therefore, for
fast gradient separations to have small delay volumes, especially with narrow
bore columns (e.g., 2.1 mm i.d.) as often used with mass spectrometric
detection.

How to Configure the Optimum Delay Volume
For fast gradients over 0.5 min, the delay volume of the system can be easily
reduced without changing the physical configuration of the system. The change
is achieved by changing the behavior of the multisampler. The delay volume of
the autosampler is due to the flow path from the injection valve through the
metering device, needle, needle seat, and connecting capillaries back to the
injection valve (see Table 34 on page 172). For a 1290/1260 Infinity II
Multisampler, the delay volume equates approximately to 78 µL (G7167B) or
265 µL (G7167A). To make an injection, the valve switches from mainpass (main
path) to bypass so that the metering device can draw the sample into the needle
capillary. The injection is made when the valve switches back to mainpass (main
path) and the sample is flushed onto the column. The valve remains in this
position during analysis so that the autosampler is continually flushed and hence
the gradient has to flow through this delay volume to reach the column. This can
be eliminated by switching the injection valve from mainpass (main path) to
bypass after the injection has been made and the injected sample has been
flushed onto the column. In practice, this can be done a few seconds after
injection by selecting the Automatic Delay Volume Reduction (ADVR) function in
the autosampler setup menu. The Flush-out Factor (typically five times injection
volume) ensures that enough time is allowed to flush the sample out of the
injector before switching to bypass. For instance, a 1 µL injection under standard
conditions effectively reduces the system delay volume by approximately 50 µL
or 240 µL, depending on the installed Multisampler.

Table 34 Schematic of injection steps in the Multisampler (Single needle)
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 40 Valve in mainpass (main path), flow through
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 41 Valve in bypass, drawing sample

Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 42 Valve in bypass, washing needle
Solvent Pump
Sampling loop
Wash
pump
Wash Needle Waste

port seat
Metering
device
Multisampler Column
Figure 43 Valve in mainpass (main path), sample injected

Column
Solvent
Sampling loop
P1 P2 Wash
Pump
Wash Needle
port seat
4
3
5
2
6 Metering
1
device
Multisampler
Pump Waste
Figure 44 Valve in bypass, needle seat backflush (Multiwash)
When using ADVR, it should be noted that the gradient has already started at the
pump at the instant of injection. The question should be asked whether the
gradient has already reached the autosampler, in which case a small step in the
gradient results. This happens when the delay volume is less than the flush-out
volume and is not necessarily a problem but may be a factor to be considered in
a method transfer. With a flush-out factor of 5 and an injection volume of 10 µL,
the autosampler allows 50 µL to pass through before switching to bypass which,
with a delay volume of 50 µL, means that the gradient just reached the injection
valve. Smaller injection volumes have no effect, but for larger injection volumes
this introduces a small step in the gradient. The flow rate in use also has an
impact on the decision to use ADVR or not. At a0.2 mL/min the delay time saved
is 21 seconds, while at 1.0 mL/min it is 4 seconds.
The ADVR function is unlikely to be suitable for applications involving
compounds that are known to cause carryover problems. The best way to reduce
the delay volume is to install the 40 µL Analytical Head and the 20 µL Loop. To
get the best results, it is also recommended to order the Low Dispersion Heat
Exchanger and the micro flow cell for UV. This reduces the delay volume by 60 µL
or 250 µL.

How to Achieve Higher Injection Volumes
The standard configuration of the Multisampler can inject a maximum volume of

20 μL (G7167B and G7137A) or 100 μL (G7167A and G5668A) with the standard
loop capillaries. To increase the injection volume, a Multidraw Kit can be used,
where extra volume is created by installing an extension capillary between the
needle seat and the injection valve. Two different kits are available: the Large
Volume Injection Kit (G4216-69711, providing 80 μL of extra volume) and the
Multidraw Kit (G7167-68711, providing either 400 or 1400 μL of extra volume).
For higher injection volumes, larger analytical heads and sample loops can also
be installed: 100 μL Analytical Head with 40 or 100 μL loops (for G7167B), and
900 μL Analytical Head with 500 or 900 μL loops (for G7167A and G7167B).
To calculate the delay volume of the Multisampler when using the Multidraw Kit,
NOTE double the volume of the extended capillary. The system delay volume due to the
Multisampler will increase accordingly.
Whenever a method is scaled down from a larger column to a smaller column it

is important that the method translation allows for reducing the injection volume
in proportion to the volume of the column to maintain the performance of the
method. This keeps the volume of the injection at the same percentage volume
with respect to the column. This is particularly important if the injection solvent is
stronger (more eluotropic) than the starting mobile phase and any increase will
affect the separation particularly for early running peaks (low retention factor).
Sometimes, it is the cause of peak distortion and the general rule is to keep the
injection solvent the same or weaker than the starting gradient composition. This
has a bearing on whether, or by how much, the injection volume can be
increased. The user should check for signs of increased dispersion (wider or
more skewed peaks and reduced peak resolution) when trying to increase the
injection size. If an injection is made in a weak solvent, the volume can probably
be increased further because the effect will be to concentrate the analyte on the
head of the column at the start of the gradient. Conversely if the injection is in a
stronger solvent than the starting mobile phase, then increased injection volume
will spread the band of analyte down the column ahead of the gradient resulting
in peak dispersion and loss of resolution.

Perhaps the main consideration in determining injection volume is the diameter

of the column as this has a big impact on peak dispersion. Peak heights can be
higher on a narrow column than with a larger injection on a wider column
because there is less peak dispersion. With 2.1 mm i.d. columns typical injection
volumes might range up to 5 to 10 µL but it is very dependent on the chemistry of
the analyte and mobile phase as discussed earlier. In a gradient separation,
injection volumes of about 5 % of the column volume might be achieved while
maintaining good resolution and peak dispersion. One way to achieve larger
injections is to use a trapping column selected by a switching valve to capture
and concentrate the injection before switching it, i.e. injecting it, onto an
analytical column, see . The valve can be conveniently located in the Multicolumn
Thermostat.
Pump A / autosampler Pump A / autosampler

Analytical Analytical
column / column /
detector detector
Waste Waste
Pump B Pump B
Enrichment column Enrichment column

Position 1-6 Position 1-2

How to Achieve High Throughput
How to Achieve High Throughput
The injection can be optimized for speed remembering that drawing the sample
too fast can reduce the reproducibility. Marginal gains are to be made here as the
sample volumes used tend towards the smaller end of the range in any case. A
significant portion of the injection time is the time taken with the needle
movements to and from the vial and into the flush port. These manipulations can
be performed while the previous separation is running. This is known as
overlapped injection and it can be easily turned on from the Multisampler setup
screen in the control software. The Multisampler can switch the flow to bypass
after the injection has been made and then after, for example, 3 minutes into a 4
minutes run, start aspirating the next sample and preparing for injection. This can
typically save 0.5 to 1 minute per injection.

How to Achieve Higher Resolution
Increased resolution in a separation will improve the qualitative and quantitative

data analysis, allow more peaks to be separated or offer further scope for
speeding up the separation. This section explains how resolution can be
increased by examining the following points:
• Optimize selectivity
• Smaller particle-size packing
• Longer columns
• Shallower gradients, faster flow
Resolution between two peaks is described by the resolution equation:
where
• Rs=resolution,
• N=plate count (measure of column efficiency),
• =selectivity (between two peaks),
• k2=retention factor of second peak (formerly called capacity factor).
The term that has the most significant effect on resolution is the selectivity, . In
practice, varying this term involves changing the type of stationary phase (C18,
C8, phenyl, nitrile etc.), the mobile phase, and temperature to maximize the
selectivity differences between the solutes to be separated. This is a substantial
piece of work that is best done with an automated method development system,
which allows assessment of a wide range of conditions on different columns and
mobile phases in an ordered scouting protocol. This section considers how to get
higher resolution with any chosen stationary and mobile phases. If an automated
method development system was used in the decision on phases, it is likely that
short columns were used for fast analysis in each step of the scouting.
The resolution equation shows that the next most significant term is the plate
count or efficiency, N, which can be optimized in several ways. N is inversely
proportional to the particle size and directly proportional to the length of a
column. Smaller particle size and a longer column thus result in a higher plate
number. The pressure rises with the inverse square of the particle size and
proportionally with the length of the column. This is the reason that the 1290
Infinity II LC System was designed to go to 1300 bar so that it can run

sub-2-micron particles and column length can be increased to 100 mm or

150 mm. There are even examples of 100 mm and 150 mm columns linked to
give 250 mm length. Resolution increases with the square root of N so doubling
the length of the column will increase resolution by a factor of 1.4. What is
achievable depends on the viscosity of the mobile phase as this relates directly to
the pressure. Methanol mixtures will generate more backpressure than
acetonitrile mixtures. Acetonitrile is often preferred because peak shapes are
better and narrower in addition to the lower viscosity but methanol generally
yields better selectivity (certainly for small molecules less than about 500 Da).
The viscosity can be reduced by increasing the temperature but it should be
remembered that this can change the selectivity of the separation. Experiment
will show if this leads to increase or decrease in selectivity. As flow and pressure
are increased, it should be remembered that frictional heating inside the column
will increase and that can lead to slightly increased dispersion and possibly a
small selectivity change both of which could be seen as a reduction in resolution.
The latter case might be offset by reducing the temperature of the thermostat by
a few degrees and again experiment will reveal the answer.

The van Deemter curve shows that the optimum flow rate through an STM
column is higher than for larger particles and is fairly flat as the flow rate
increases. Typical, close to optimum, flow rates for STM columns are: 2 ml/min
for 4.6 mm i.d.; and 0.4 ml/min for 2.1 mm i.d. columns.
In isocratic separations, increasing the retention factor, k, results in better
resolution because the solute is retained longer. In gradient separations the
retention is described by k* in the following equation:
where:
• k* = mean k value,
• tG= time length of gradient (or segment of gradient) (min),
• F = flow (mL/min),
• Vm = column delay volume,
• %B = change in fraction of solvent B during the gradient,
• S = constant (ca. 4 – 5 for small molecules).
This shows that k and hence resolution can be increased by having a shallower
gradient (2 to 5 %/min change is a guideline), a higher flow rate, and a smaller
column volume. This equation also shows how to speed up an existing gradient
– if the flow is doubled but the gradient time is halved, k* remains constant, and
the separation looks the same but happens in half the time. Recently published
research has shown how a shorter STM column (at temperatures above 40 °C)
can generate higher peak capacity than a longer STM column by virtue of running
it faster. (See Petersson et al., J.Sep.Sci, 31, 2346-2357, 2008, Maximizing peak
capacity and separation speed in liquid chromatography.)

How to Achieve Higher Sensitivity
How to Achieve Higher Sensitivity
The sensitivity of a separation method is linked to the choice of stationary and

mobile phases as good separation with narrow peaks and a stable baseline with
minimal noise are desirable. The choice of instrument configuration will have an
effect and a major impact is the setup of the detector. This section considers
how sensitivity is affected by:
• Pump mixer volume
• Narrower columns
• Detector flow cell
• Detector parameters
In addition, the discussion on detector parameters also mentions the related
topics of selectivity and linearity.
Columns
Sensitivity is specified as a signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) and hence the need to
maximize peak height and minimize baseline noise. Any reduction in peak
dispersion will help to maintain peak height and so extra-column volume should
be minimized by use of short, narrow internal diameter, connection capillaries
and correctly installed fittings. Using smaller inner diameter columns should
result in higher peak height and is therefore ideal for applications with limited
sample amounts. If the same sample amount can be injected on a smaller i.d.
column, then the dilution due to column diameter will be less and the sensitivity
will increase. For example, decreasing the column i.d. from 4.6 mm to 2.1 mm
results in a theoretical gain in peak height of 4.7 times due to the decreased
dilution in the column. For a mass spectrometer detector, the lower flow rates of
narrow columns can result in higher ionization efficiencies and therefore higher
sensitivity.

How to Achieve Lowest Carry Over
Carryover is measured when residual peaks from a previous active-containing

injection appear in a subsequent blank solvent injection. There will be carryover
between active injections, which may lead to erroneous results. The level of
carryover is reported as the area of the peak in the blank solution expressed as a
percentage of the area in the previous active injection. The Multisampler is
optimized for lowest carryover by careful design of the flow path and use of
materials in which sample adsorption is minimized. A carryover figure of 0.001 %
should be achievable even when a triple quadrupole mass spectrometer is the
detector. Operating settings of the Multisampler allow the user to set appropriate
parameters to minimize carryover in any application involving compounds liable
to stick in the system. The following functions of the Multisampler can be used to
minimize carryover:
• Internal needle wash
• External needle wash
• Needle seat backflush
• Injection valve cleaning
The flow path, including the inside of the needle, is continuously flushed in
normal operation, providing good elimination of carryover for most situations.
Automated delay volume reduction (ADVR) reduces both the delay volume and
the flushing of the standard Multisampler and should not be used with analytes
where carryover might be a problem.
The outside of the needle can be washed using a wash vial in a specific location
or the flush port. If a wash vial is chosen, then this vial should have no septum
and should contain a solvent suitable for washing the sample from the needle.
The septum is not used to avoid wiping contamination off the needle on the
downstream only to re-apply it on the upstroke. The needle can be dipped into the
vial multiple times. This will be effective in removing a small degree of carryover,
but for more effective external needle wash, use the flush port.
The flush port is located above and behind the needle seat, and in the standard
hardware configuration a peristaltic pump delivers the wash solvent. It has a
volume of 0.68 mL and the peristaltic pump delivers 5 mL/min, which means the
flush port volume is completely refilled with fresh solvent in 7 s.

If the flush port is selected, the user can set how long the outside of the needle is
to be washed with fresh solvent. This can last from 2 – 3 s in routine situations
where carryover is less of a problem, to 10 – 20 s for complete washing.
It is recommended that the external needle wash in the flush port should be
standard procedure to avoid contaminating the needle seat. If the needle seat
becomes contaminated, it must be back-flushed. In the standard setup, this task
can be done manually by changing the flow connections, or it can be automated
using the Flexible Cube (G4227A). In the Multiwash setup (G4757A), the needle
seat back-flush is automated and can be performed with up to three different
solvents.
The flush port and its solvent delivery pump and tubing should be regularly
flushed to ensure the lowest carryover. For example, before using the system
each day, prime the flush pump for three minutes with appropriate solvent.
When other measures have failed to eliminate carryover, it might be that analyte
is adsorbing to the inner surfaces of the injection valve. In this case, the auto
clean feature in the CDS can be activated, and the valve will make additional
switching movements to clean out the flow path. If the problem compounds
need a high percentage of organic phase for elution, it is recommended to switch
the injection valve at the high percentage of organic phase after the last peak has
eluted. It is also recommended to switch the injection valve again after the initial
conditions for the mobile phase have stabilized. This ensures that the bypass
groove in the rotor seal of the valve contains the gradient start conditions, which
is especially important for flow rates below 0.5 mL/min. For samples where the
outside of the needle cannot be cleaned sufficiently with water or alcohol from
the flush pump, use wash vials with an appropriate solvent. With an injector
program, several wash vials can be used for cleaning.
The optimum carryover performance of the Multisampler is achieved after a
run-in period of new instruments or after the exchange of consumable parts (like
needle, needle seat and valve parts). During injections in this period, surfaces of
these parts adjust to each other. After this period, we recommend back-flushing
the needle seat to get the sealing areas between needle and needle seat clean.
Regular preventive maintenance service is recommended as the carryover
performance of the autosampler depends on the integrity of these consumable
parts.

User Interfaces 185

Agilent Lab Advisor Software 186
This chapter gives an overview about the troubleshooting and diagnostic

features and the different user interfaces.

User Interfaces
User Interfaces
• Depending on the user interface, the available tests and the screens/reports
may vary.
• The preferred tool for troubleshooting and diagnostics should be Agilent Lab
Advisor Software, see “Agilent Lab Advisor Software” on page 186.
• The Agilent OpenLab ChemStation C.01.03 and above do not include any
maintenance/test functions.
• Screenshots used within these procedures are based on the Agilent Lab
Advisor Software.

Agilent Lab Advisor Software
The Agilent Lab Advisor Software (basic license, shipped with an Agilent LC
pump) is a standalone product that can be used with or without a
chromatographic data system. Agilent Lab Advisor helps to manage the lab for
high-quality chromatographic results by providing a detailed system overview of
all connected analytical instruments with instrument status, Early Maintenance
Feedback counters (EMF), instrument configuration information, and diagnostic
tests. With the push of a button, a detailed diagnostic report can be generated.
Upon request, the user can send this report to Agilent for a significantly improved
troubleshooting and repair process.
The Agilent Lab Advisor software is available in two versions:
• Lab Advisor Basic
• Lab Advisor Advanced
Lab Advisor Basic is included with every Agilent 1200 Infinity Series and Agilent
InfinityLab LC Series instrument.
The Lab Advisor Advanced features can be unlocked by purchasing a license key,
and include real-time monitoring of instrument actuals, all various instrument
signals, and state machines. In addition, all diagnostic test results, calibration
results, and acquired signal data can be uploaded to a shared network folder. The
Review Client included in Lab Advisor Advanced allows to load and examine the
uploaded data no matter on which instrument it was generated. This makes Data
Sharing an ideal tool for internal support groups and users who want to track the
instrument history of their analytical systems.
The optional Agilent Maintenance Wizard Add-on provides an easy-to-use,
step-by-step multimedia guide for performing preventive maintenance on Agilent
1200 Infinity LC Series instrument.
The tests and diagnostic features that are provided by the Agilent Lab Advisor
software may differ from the descriptions in this manual. For details, refer to the
Agilent Lab Advisor software help files.

8 Error Information
What Are Error Messages 189

General Error Messages 190
Timeout 190
Shutdown 191
Remote Timeout 192
Lost CAN Partner 192
Leak Sensor Short 193
Leak Sensor Open 194
Compensation Sensor Open 195
Compensation Sensor Short 195
Fan Failed 196
Leak 197
Sampler Error Messages 198
Draw command aborted 198
Sample container vessel missing 199
Initialization failed 200
Injection valve initialization failed 201
Sampler alignment procedure command failed 201
Sampler transport initialization failed 202
Front door error 202
Alignment procedure: needle command failed 203
Needle hit the vessel bottom 204
Robot drive current too high 205
Robot drive hardware overcurrent 205
Cleaning Procedure Failed 206
Metering Device Initialization Failed 206
Flush Pump Device Initialization Failed 207
Peripheral Valve Initialization Failed 207
Seat Back Flushing Failed 208
Move Needle to Parkstation Failed 208
Taking Needle from Parkstation Failed 208
Taking sample tray from hotel position failed 209
Transport Motor Index Missing 209
Transport Motor Tag cannot be read 209
Peristaltic Pump Movement Failed 210

8 Error Information
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Error Messages 211

Sample temperature control voltage too low, check fuses and wires 211
Sample temperature control switched off due to condensate 212
Sample temperature control switched off due to overpressure 213
Sample temperature control sensor electronics calibration failed 214
Sample temperature control switched off due to supply voltage drop 215
Cooler condensate sensor defect 216
Cooler PCB is in error mode 217
Cooler condenser fan failed 218
Thermostat communication error 219
Heater defect 220
Heater in operating error 220
Thermostat sensor defect 221
Compressor has error 222
Sample Thermostat unknown 222
Thermostat fan defect 223
This chapter describes the meaning of error messages, and provides information
on probable causes and suggested actions how to recover from error conditions.

8 Error Information
What Are Error Messages
What Are Error Messages
Error messages are displayed in the user interface when an electronic,

mechanical, or hydraulic (flow path) failure occurs which requires attention
before the analysis can be continued (for example, repair, or exchange of
consumables is necessary). In the event of such a failure, the red status indicator
at the front of the module is switched on, and an entry is written into the module
logbook.
If an error occurs outside a method run, other modules will not be informed about
this error. If it occurs within a method run, all connected modules will get a
notification, all LEDs get red and the run will be stopped. Depending on the
module type, this stop is implemented differently. For example, for a pump the
flow will be stopped for safety reasons. For a detector, the lamp will stay on in
order to avoid equilibration time. Depending on the error type, the next run can
only be started, if the error has been resolved, for example liquid from a leak has
been dried. Errors for presumably single time events can be recovered by
switching on the system in the user interface.
Special handling is done in case of a leak. As a leak is a potential safety issue and
may have occurred at a different module from where it has been observed, a leak
always causes a shutdown of all modules, even outside a method run.
In all cases, error propagation is done via the CAN bus or via an APG/ERI remote
cable (see documentation for the APG/ERI interface).

8 Error Information
General Error Messages
General error messages are generic to all Agilent series HPLC modules and may
show up on other modules as well.
Timeout
Error ID: 0062
The timeout threshold was exceeded.
Probable cause Suggested actions
1 The analysis was completed successfully, Check the logbook for the occurrence and source
and the timeout function switched off the of a not-ready condition. Restart the analysis
module as requested. where required.
2 A not-ready condition was present during a Check the logbook for the occurrence and source
sequence or multiple-injection run for a of a not-ready condition. Restart the analysis
period longer than the timeout threshold. where required.

8 Error Information
Shutdown
Error ID: 0063
An external instrument has generated a shutdown signal on the remote line.
The module continually monitors the remote input connectors for status signals.
A LOW signal input on pin 4 of the remote connector generates the error
message.
1 Leak detected in another module with a CAN Fix the leak in the external instrument before
connection to the system. restarting the module.
2 Leak detected in an external instrument with Fix the leak in the external instrument before
a remote connection to the system. restarting the module.
3 Shut-down in an external instrument with a Check external instruments for a shut-down con-
remote connection to the system. dition.
4 The degasser failed to generate sufficient Check the vacuum degasser for an error condi-
vacuum for solvent degassing. tion. Refer to the Service Manual for the degasser
or the pump that has the degasser built-in.

8 Error Information
Remote Timeout
Error ID: 0070
A not-ready condition is still present on the remote input. When an analysis is
started, the system expects all not-ready conditions (for example, a not-ready
condition during detector balance) to switch to run conditions within one minute
of starting the analysis. If a not-ready condition is still present on the remote line
after one minute the error message is generated.
1 Not-ready condition in one of the instru- Ensure the instrument showing the not-ready
ments connected to the remote line. condition is installed correctly, and is set up cor-
rectly for analysis.
2 Defective remote cable. Exchange the remote cable.
3 Defective components in the instrument Check the instrument for defects (refer to the
showing the not-ready condition. instrument’s documentation).
Lost CAN Partner

Error ID: 0071
During an analysis, the internal synchronization or communication between one
or more of the modules in the system has failed.
The system processors continually monitor the system configuration. If one or
more of the modules is no longer recognized as being connected to the system,
the error message is generated.
1 CAN cable disconnected. • Ensure all the CAN cables are connected cor-
rectly.
• Ensure all CAN cables are installed correctly.
2 Defective CAN cable. Exchange the CAN cable.
3 Defective mainboard in another module. Switch off the system. Restart the system, and
determine which module or modules are not rec-
ognized by the system.

8 Error Information
Leak Sensor Short

Error ID: 0082
The leak sensor in the module has failed (short circuit).
The current through the leak sensor is dependent on temperature. A leak is
detected when solvent cools the leak sensor, causing the leak sensor current to
change within defined limits. If the current increases above the upper limit, the
error message is generated.
1 Defective leak sensor. Exchange the leak sensor.
2 Leak sensor incorrectly routed, being • Make sure the leak sensor is installed cor-
pinched by a metal component. rectly.
• Correct the routing of the cable.
• If cable defective, exchange the leak sensor.
3 Power switch assembly defective Exchange the power switch assembly.
4 Cable or contact problem. • Inspect the flat ribbon cable from the power
switch board to the mainboard.
• Inspect the contacts on the flat ribbon
cable's ends.

8 Error Information
Leak Sensor Open

Error ID: 0083
The leak sensor in the module has failed (open circuit).
The current through the leak sensor is dependent on temperature. A leak is
detected when solvent cools the leak sensor, causing the leak sensor current to
change within defined limits. If the current falls outside the lower limit, the error
message is generated.
1 Leak sensor not connected to the power Ensure the leak sensor is connected correctly.
switch board.
2 Defective leak sensor. Exchange the leak sensor.
3 Leak sensor incorrectly routed, being Exchange the leak sensor.

pinched by a metal component.
4 Power switch assembly defective Exchange the power switch assembly.

8 Error Information
Compensation Sensor Open

Error ID: 0081
The ambient-compensation sensor (NTC) on the power switch board in the
module has failed (open circuit).
The resistance across the temperature compensation sensor (NTC) on the
power switch board is dependent on ambient temperature. The change in
resistance is used by the leak circuit to compensate for ambient temperature
changes. If the resistance across the sensor increases above the upper limit, the
1 Loose connection between the power switch Check the ribbon cable between the power
board and the mainboard switch board and the mainboard.
2 Defective power switch assembly Exchange the power switch assembly.
Compensation Sensor Short

Error ID: 0080
The ambient-compensation sensor (NTC) on the power switch board in the
module has failed (open circuit).
The resistance across the temperature compensation sensor (NTC) on the
power switch board is dependent on ambient temperature. The change in
resistance is used by the leak circuit to compensate for ambient temperature
changes. If the resistance across the sensor falls below the lower limit, the error
message is generated.
1 Defective power switch assembly Exchange the power switch assembly.
2 Loose connection between the power switch Check the ribbon cable between the power
board and the mainboard switch board and the mainboard.

8 Error Information
Fan Failed
Error ID: 0068
The fan in the autosampler module or in the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
has failed.
The hall sensor on the fan shaft is used by the mainboard to monitor the fan
speed. If the fan speed falls below a certain limit for a certain length of time, the
This limit is given by 2 revolutions/second for longer than 5 seconds.
Depending on the module, assemblies (e.g. the lamp in the detector) are turned
off to assure that the module does not overheat inside.
1 Fan cable disconnected. Ensure the fan is connected correctly.
2 Defective fan. Exchange fan.
3 Defective Sample Cooler/Sample Thermo- Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat.

stat fan
4 Defective mainboard. Exchange the mainboard.

8 Error Information
Leak
Error ID: 0064
A leak was detected in the module.
The signals from the two temperature sensors (leak sensor and board-mounted
temperature-compensation sensor) are used by the leak algorithm to determine
whether a leak is present. When a leak occurs, the leak sensor is cooled by the
solvent. This changes the resistance of the leak sensor which is sensed by the
leak sensor circuit on the main board.
1 Loose fittings. Ensure all fittings are tight.
2 Broken capillary. Exchange defective capillaries.
3 Leaking rotor seal or needle seat. Exchange the rotor seal or seat capillary.
4 Defective metering seal. • Exchange the metering seal.

• Make sure the leak sensor is thoroughly dry
before restarting the autosampler.
5 Leaking peristaltic pump Exchange the peristaltic pump.

8 Error Information
Sampler Error Messages
Please verify the first errors in the list. The last error message could be a
NOTE subsequent error.
Draw command aborted

Error ID: 25478
The robot (sample handler) failed to move correctly during injection sequence.
1 Missing vessel Check if the sample vial is installed in the correct

position, or edit the method or sequence accord-
ingly.
2 Needle command failed Check the status of the needle assembly. Per-
form an autoreferencing.

8 Error Information
Sample container vessel missing

Error ID: 25471
No vial was found in the position defined in the method or sequence. When the
needle carrier moves to a vial and the needle lowers into the vial, the position of
the needle is monitored by an encoder behind the vial pusher. If no vial is present,
the encoder detects an error and the message “missing vial” is generated.
1 No vial in the position defined in the method • Install the sample vial in the correct position.
• Edit the method or sequence accordingly.
2 Defective needle assembly Exchange the needle assembly.
3 Sample container missing or not correctly Install the sample container correctly on the tray.
installed

8 Error Information
Initialization failed
Error ID: 25120
The autosampler failed to complete initialization correctly. The autosampler
initialization procedure moves the robot to its reference positions in a predefined
routine. During initialization, the processor monitors the position sensors and
motor encoders to check for correct movement. During initialization the system
also checks the status of the sample hotel and the hydraulic box. If one or more
of the movements or the status information of the subparts is not read out
successfully, the error message is generated.
1 Front door not installed correctly. • Check if the front door is installed correctly.
• Check if the magnet is in place in the front
door.
2 Sample handler not aligned correctly. Do an autoreferencing.
3 Mechanical obstruction of the sample han- Ensure unobstructed movement

dler.
4 Defective sample handler motors. Exchange the sample handler.
5 Loose connection between hydraulic box Remove the hydraulic box and reinstall it.
and adapter board
6 Defective sample hotel electronic Replace hotel boards.
7 Defective specific main board or fusion Replace mainboard or fusion board.

board

8 Error Information
Injection valve initialization failed

Error ID: 25123
initialization procedure can recognize and move the injection valve to its
reference positions in a predefined routine. During initialization, the processor
monitors the position sensor, tag sensors, and actuator motor to check for
correct movement. If one or more of the movements or the status information of
the subparts is not read out successfully, the error message is generated.
1 Injection valve not installed correctly. Check if the injection valve is installed correctly.
2 TAG and TAG reader not aligned correctly. Check if the TAG or the TAG Reader are aligned
correctly.
3 Electrical connection or components are Exchange affected components.

defective.
Sampler alignment procedure command failed

Error ID: 25034
The autosampler failed to complete the alignment correctly.
1 Mechanical obstruction of the sample han- Ensure unobstructed movement.

dler.
2 Defective sample handler motors. Replace the sample handler.

8 Error Information
Sampler transport initialization failed

Error ID: 25121
initialization procedure moves the robot to its reference positions in a predefined
routine. During initialization, the processor monitors the position sensors and
motor encoders to check for correct movement. During initialization, the
processor monitors the position sensor, tag sensors, and actuator motor to
check for correct movement. If one or more of the movements or the status
information of the subparts is not read out successfully, the error message is
generated.
1 Sample handler not aligned correctly. Switch off the instrument and do an autorefer-
encing.
2 Mechanical obstruction of the sample han- Ensure unobstructed movement

dler.
Front door error

Error ID: 25051, 25049
During initialization, the autosampler recognizes the position of the front door. If
the front door is open, this error message is displayed.
1 Front door is not closed properly. Check if the front door is closed or if the magnet
is missing.

8 Error Information
Alignment procedure: needle command failed

Error ID: 25095
During the parking or movements of the needle assembly, the status information
of the subparts is not read out successfully and the error message is generated.
1 The sample loop capillary was squeezed in • Check if the sample loop is installed cor-
the needle parkstation. rectly.
• Do an autoreferencing afterwards (needle
assembly must be installed in the needle
parkstation during this procedure).
2 The needle assembly was not installed cor- • Check if the needle assembly is installed cor-
rectly in the needle parkstation. rectly.
• Install the needle assembly on the sample
handler.
• Do a reset of the sample handler.
• Do an autoreferencing (the needle assembly
must be installed in the needle parkstation
during this procedure).
• If this will not help: Please contact your Agi-
lent service representative.
3 Needle parkstation is loose. Carefully tighten the needle parkstation.
4 For G5668A (Bio-inert Multisampler): Replace the needle assembly.

Ceramic part of the needle is broken.

8 Error Information
Needle hit the vessel bottom

Error ID: 25226
The autosampler failed to complete injection sequence correctly. The
autosampler can move and draw sample from the draw position and generates
the error message.
1 Sample container is not installed correctly in Check if the sample container is installed cor-
the pallet. rectly.
2 Sample container definition in the CDS is not • Check if the correct sample container is
correct. selected in the CDS.
• Verify if the dimension of the sample con-
tainer match the database of your CDS.
3 Sample handler not aligned correctly. • Check if the sample handler can move freely.
• Do an auto referencing (needle assembly
• If this will not help: Please contact your Agi-
lent service representative.

8 Error Information
Robot drive current too high

Error ID: 25409
initialization procedure can not move the motors inside of the sample handler to
their reference positions in a predefined routine. During initialization, the
processor monitors the position sensor and encoders to check for correct
movement. If one or more of the movements or the status information of the
subparts is not read out successfully, the error message is generated.
1 Sample handler is blocked. • Check if the sample handler can move freely.
• Switch off the instrument.
• Do an auto referencing (needle assembly
Robot drive hardware overcurrent

Error ID: 25411
electronic has detected a increasing of the internal limits and has generated the
error message.
1 Bad electronic connections Check the mainboard/fusion board.
2 Defective mainboard/fusion board Replace the mainboard/fusion board.

8 Error Information
Cleaning Procedure Failed

Error ID: 25400, 1-4
Cleaning procedure failed. Parameter shows what kind of cleaning procedure has
failed: 1 = Wash, 2 = Prime, 3 = Autoclean, 4 = Clooged seat
1 Solvent lines not installed correctly (valve Check status of the solvent lines. Use isopropa-
block or flushpump) nol for verification.
2 Clogged needle seat Replace the needle seat
Metering Device Initialization Failed

Error ID: 25122
1 Hydraulic box not in place. • Push hydraulic box to the right and towards
the back of the module, to guarantee proper
connection between the hydraulic box board
and the hydraulic adapter board.
• Make sure the hydraulic box is fitted in the
main chassis and locked in place by the
transport protection screw on the right side
of the module.
2 Metering device not properly installed. Check the correct positioning of RFID tag and tag
reader.

8 Error Information
Flush Pump Device Initialization Failed

Error ID: 25124
of the module.
2 Flush pump not properly installed. Check the correct positioning of RFID tag and tag
reader.
Peripheral Valve Initialization Failed

Error ID: 25125
of the module.
2 Valve not properly installed. Check the correct positioning of RFID tag and tag
reader.

8 Error Information
Seat Back Flushing Failed

Error ID: 25119
1 Clogged needle seat. Replace the needle seat.
Move Needle to Parkstation Failed

Error ID: 25106
1 Autoreferencing values missing or outdated. Manually install the needle into the parkstation,
clear current autoreferencing values (use Clear
data on Lab Advisor), power cycle the module
and perform autoreferencing.
Taking Needle from Parkstation Failed

Error ID: 25105
1 Parkstation is loose. Carefully tighten the parkstation. Avoid overtight-

ening, as this could damage the baseplate of the
module.
2 Needle assembly is defective. Replace the needle assembly.
3 Autoreferencing needed. Manually install the needle into the parkstation,

clear current autoreferencing values (use Clear
data on Lab Advisor), power cycle the module
and perform autoreferencing.

8 Error Information
Taking sample tray from hotel position failed

Error ID: 25104
1 Mechanical obstruction of the sample han- Install the leak plane and reference vial holder
dler by reference vial holder. correctly.
Transport Motor Index Missing

Error ID: 25235
The index of a transport motor cannot be found. The motor ID is given in the
event parameter: 0=A, 1=B, 2=Z1, 3=Z2.
1 Defective fuse. Replace the robot fuse.
2 Defective mainboard. Replace the mainboard.
Transport Motor Tag cannot be read

Error ID: 25236
The tag data of a transport motor cannot be read. The motor ID is given in the
event parameter: 0=A, 1=B, 2=Z1, 3=Z2.
1 One of the sample handler cables is not Check that the sample handler cables are prop-
properly connected. erly connected to the mainboard.
2 One of the sample handler cables is dam- Replace the sample handler.
aged (corroded or chipped off).
3 Defective mainboard. Replace the mainboard.

8 Error Information
Peristaltic Pump Movement Failed

Error ID: 25463
1 Pump tubing blocked. Verify that the solvent tubing is not blocked.
2 Pump motor is defective. Replace the pump motor.
3 Pump is defective. Replace the peristaltic pump.

8 Error Information
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Error Messages
Sample temperature control voltage too low, check

fuses and wires
Error ID: 30713
The compressor voltage is below the lower threshold value.
The voltage of the compressor can be verified in the Instrument Control tab of
Lab Advisor and should normally be 24 ± 1 V.
1 Blown fuses Check if any of the fuses on the sampler main-

board are blown. If necessary, replace them.
2 Defective cables Check if the power or the data cable connecting

the sampler with the cooler/thermostat is dam-
aged. If necessary, replace them.
3 Defective power supply Verify if the voltage of the sampler power supply
is correct. If necessary, replace the power supply.
4 Defective electronic boards Check if installing another cooler/thermostat in

the sampler provides the same error pattern. If
necessary, replace the module-specific main-
board or the Fusion board.
5 Defective cooler/thermostat Check if installing the cooler/thermostat in

another sampler provides the same error pattern.
If necessary, replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
Thermostat.
6 Other hardware error • Please contact the channel assist group for
more information. Include the following infor-
mation:
• All relevant Lab Advisor data: System Report,
Diagnostic Buffers, and Logs & Results (for
Lab Advisor 02.11 [292] or newer, use the
Export Traces function in the Configuration
tab).
• A detailed description of the error.
• Relevant photos, videos, and screenshots.

8 Error Information
Sample temperature control switched off due to

condensate
Error ID: 30715
The cooler/thermostat was switched off due to a condensate event.
Based on the parameter value, the error event can bear slightly different
meanings:
• 30715,1 indicates a certain condensate event.
• 30715,2 indicates a short-circuited condensate sensor.
With firmware version D.07.27 or newer, additional diagnostic information can be
accessed for this error event in the „THERMOSTATERR” diagnostic buffer:
• 30709: Cooler condensate sensor in shortcut condition.
1 Overfilled container Empty the condensate container. Verify that the
open end of the tubing doesn’t immerse in the liq-
uid.
2 Drainage issues • Verify the correct plumbing of the conden-

sate drainage system.
• Make sure that no kinks or mechanical
blocks are present in the drainage system.
• Avoid the formation of the siphoning effect.
• Make sure that the hosting sampler is level.
3 Defective sensor • Verify the correct functioning of the conden-

sate sensor: A constant zero reading for the
condensate sensor current could be the indi-
cation of a defective condensate sensor.
• If necessary, replace the sensor. This should
only be performed for error event 30715,2.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information

overpressure
Error ID: 30716
The pressure in the refrigerant circuit exceeded the maximum allowed level. To
prevent any damage to the system, the compressor was turned off.
This error event can also be triggered when the condenser fan of the
cooler/thermostat is not working properly. In this case, error event 30726 "Cooler
condenser fan failed" should also show up in the diagnostic buffers or the
logbook.
1 Overheated condenser Turn off the cooler/thermostat and wait for 15 min
to allow the system to cool down. Verify if there is
enough space around the sampler for adequate
ventilation and the cooler/thermostat is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
2 Defective condenser fan • Verify the correct functioning of the condenser

fan:
• Turn on the compressor, set the temperature to
4 °C, and wait until the condenser temperature
has reached 40 – 45 °C. If the reading for the
condenser fan speed is still zero in Lab Advisor,
it means that the fan is broken.
• The appearance of error event 30726 „Cooler
condenser fan failed” in the diagnostic buffers
is also an indication for the condenser fan
being defective.
• If necessary, replace the Sample Cooler/Sam-
ple Thermostat.
3 Defective cooler/thermostat Check if installing the cooler/thermostat in another

sampler provides the same error pattern. If neces-
sary, replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermo-
stat.
mation:
Diagnostic Buffers, and Logs & Results (for Lab
Advisor 02.11 [292] or newer, use the Export
Traces function in the Configuration tab).

8 Error Information
Sample temperature control sensor electronics

calibration failed
Error ID: 30717
The system is in the error state because the calibration of the analog
temperature sensor has failed.
1 Sampler incompatibility If the hosting sampler is a Vialsampler, verify its

compatibility with the Sample Cooler installed.
Units with the serial number DEBAT02000 or
below are equipped with an analog temperature
sensor that is not compatible with the Vialsam-
pler.
2 Defective cooler Check if installing the cooler in another sampler

provides the same error pattern. If necessary,
replace the Sample Cooler.

mation:
tab).

8 Error Information

supply voltage drop
Error ID: 30718
The compressor is turned off due to an unexpected drop in the supply voltage.
The voltage of the compressor can be verified in the Instrument Control tab of
Lab Advisor and should normally be 24 ± 1 V.
1 Blown fuses Check if any of the fuses on the sampler main-

board are blown. If necessary, replace them.

3 Defective power supply Verify if the voltage of the sampler power supply
is correct. If necessary, replace the power supply.


Thermostat.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Cooler condensate sensor defect

Error ID: 30719
The condensate sensor of the cooler/thermostat is not working properly.
• 30710: Cooler condensate sensor in open circuit.
1 Connection problems Disconnect and reconnect the condensate sen-

sor to the mainboard of the cooler/thermostat.
Turn on the system and verify if the error shows
up again after 8 min.
2 Defective sensor • Verify the correct functioning of the conden-

sate sensor:
• A constant zero reading for the condensate
sensor current could be the indication of a
defective condensate sensor.
• If necessary, replace the sensor.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Cooler PCB is in error mode

Error ID: 30275
The system is in the error state because the compressor control board has
encountered an unexpected error.

2 Defective cooler Check if installing the cooler in another sampler

provides the same error pattern. If necessary,
replace the Sample Cooler.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Cooler condenser fan failed

Error ID: 30726
The condenser fan of the cooler/thermostat is not working properly.
The revolution of the condenser fan can be verified in the Instrument Control tab
of Lab Advisor. Be aware that this fan turns only on when the condenser
temperature exceeds 40 – 45 °C.
1 Connection problems Disconnect and reconnect the condenser fan to

the cooler/thermostat mainboard. Turn on the
system, set the temperature to 4 °C and verify
that the condenser fan turns on when the con-
denser temperature reaches 40 – 45 °C.

Thermostat.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Thermostat communication error

Error ID: 30738
The system is in the error state because the communication between the
sampler and the thermostat has failed.
• 30778: EEPROM communication failed.
• 30777: PIC communication failed.
• 30776: Compressor control voltage error.



Thermostat.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Heater defect
Error ID: 30739
The heating function of the thermostat is not working properly.
1 Potential hardware error • Please contact the channel assist group for
mation:
tab).
Heater in operating error

Error ID: 30744
The system is in the error state because the thermostat heater has encountered
an unexpected error.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Thermostat sensor defect

Error ID: 30751
One of the digital temperature sensors of the cooler/thermostat is not working
properly.
This error event indicates that either the condenser temperature sensor or the
evaporator temperature sensor is broken. If the hosting sampler is a Vialsampler, this
error message can also point at the temperature sensor inside the sampler.
To determine which sensor is affected by the error, go to the Instrument Control tab
of Lab Advisor and look for a temperature reading of -67.7 °C:
• evaporator temperature: corresponds to the evaporator temperature sensor of the
cooler/thermostat.
• condenser temperature: corresponds to the condenser temperature sensor of the
cooler/thermostat.
• external temperature: corresponds to the temperature sensor of the Vialsampler.
• 30752: Evaporator temperature sensor defect.
• 30753: Condenser temperature sensor defect.
• 30754: Air (external) temperature sensor defect.
1 Defective evaporator sensor Disconnect and reconnect the temperature sensor
to the cooler/thermostat mainboard and verify if
the temperature reading is still -67.7 °C. If neces-
sary, replace the evaporator sensor.
2 Defective condenser sensor Disconnect and reconnect the temperature sensor

to the cooler/thermostat mainboard and verify if
the temperature reading is still -67.7 °C. If neces-
sary, replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermo-
stat.
3 Defective external sensor Disconnect and reconnect the temperature sensor to

the sampler mainboard and verify if the temperature
reading is still -67.7 °C. If necessary, replace the tem-
perature sensor inside the sampler.
more information. Include the following informa-
tion:

8 Error Information
Compressor has error

Error ID: 30756
The system is in the error state because the control board of the compressor has
encountered an unexpected error.
mation:
tab).
Sample Thermostat unknown

Error ID: 30768
1 Outdated firmware Update the firmware to the most recent version

and verify if the error still persists.
mation:
tab).

8 Error Information
Thermostat fan defect

Error ID: 30771
One of the cooling fans of the cooler/thermostat is not working properly.
This error event indicates that either the condenser fan or the evaporator fan is
not working properly. The revolution of the thermostat/cooler fans can be verified
in the Instrument Control tab of Lab Advisor. Be aware that the evaporator fan is
constantly running with a revolution of 165 ± 20 rpm, whereas the condenser fan
only turns on if the condenser temperature exceeds 40 – 45 °C. When the
evaporator fan is the subject of this error, error event 68,2 "Fan failed" can also
show up in the diagnostic buffers or the logbook.
• 30772: Evaporator fan defect.
• 30773: Condenser fan defect.
1 Defective evaporator fan Disconnect and reconnect the evaporator fan on

the cooler/thermostat mainboard and verify if the
revolution is still zero. If necessary, replace the
evaporator fan.
2 Defective condenser fan Disconnect and reconnect the condenser fan to the
cooler/thermostat mainboard, turn on the system,
set the temperature to 4 °C and verify that the con-
denser fan turns on when the condenser tempera-
ture reaches 40 – 45 °C. If necessary, replace the
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat.
3 Blown fuses Check if any of the fuses on the sampler mainboard

are blown. If necessary, replace them.
mation:

Introduction 225
System Pressure Test 226
System Pressure Test Evaluation 228
Auto Referencing 229
Maintenance Positions 231
Change Needle Assembly 232
Change Sample Loop Capillary 233
Arm Position 233
Change Metering Device 234
Injector Steps 235
Sample Cooler Function Test 237
Sample Handler Function Test 238
Sampler Leak Test 239
This chapter describes the built in test functions.

Introduction
Introduction
All tests are described based on the Agilent Lab Advisor Software B.02.06 or
above. Other user interfaces may not provide any test or just a few. For details on
the use of the interface refer to the interface documentation.
Table 35 Interfaces and available test functions
Interface Comment Available Function
Agilent Lab Advisor All tests are available • System Pressure test
• Maintenance
• Drawer Detection/Auto Ref-
erencing
• Sample Cooler Function
Adding of pressure to chro- Test
matographic signals possible • Sample Thermostat Func-
tion Test
• Sample Handler Function
Test
Agilent ChemStation No tests available • Drawer Detection/Auto Ref-

erencing
Adding of pressure to chro- • Temperature mainboard
matographic signals possible • Pressure/Pressure ripple
For details on the use of the interface refer to the interface documentation.

System Pressure Test
The test determines the leak rate of the system between pump outlet valves and
a blank nut. The blank nut can be positioned at different locations in the system
before the flow cell, to determine and verify the leak rate of individual modules
and components. The test allows for setting the pressure at which the test is
performed. The leak rate of high pressure parts is not always a linear function
and therefore it is recommended to perform the test at a pressure that
corresponds to the normal operating pressure of the system.
When • In case of a suspected leak

• To verify successful execution of maintenance

1 5067-6127 Blank Nut SL
For 1290 Infinity II Multisampler, use the Blank Nut SL which fits
the special port size of the VICI valve. This Blank Nut is back-
ward compatible and can be used for the 1260 Infinity II Multis-
ampler as well.
OR 1 5043-0277 Blank nut long 10-32, PEEK with stainless steel core
For Bio-inert or 1290 Bio systems

1 Run the System pressure test with the Agilent Lab Advisor (for further
information see Online-Help of user interface).
Figure 45 System Pressure Test – Result
Figure 46 System Pressure Test – Dynamic pressure input

System Pressure Test Evaluation
Test Failed
1 Damaged blank nut (poorly shaped from Before investigating any other possible sources
over tightening) of failure make sure that the blank nut you are
using is in a good condition and properly tight-
ened.
2 Pump leakages Perform the Pump Head Leak test.
3 Loose or leaky fittings Tighten the fittings or replace capillaries.
4 Autosampler leakages Perform the Autosampler Leak test.
5 Themostatted Column Compartment valve Replace the TCC valve rotor seal.
leakages
Notice the difference between error in the test and a failed result! An error is
NOTE caused by an abnormal termination during the operation of the test, whereas a
failed result indicates that the test result were not within the specified limits.

Auto Referencing
Auto Referencing
The multisampler auto referencing uses predefined positions on the base plate
and the sample hotel to calibrate the positioning of the needle parkstation and
the sample hotel. The auto referencing is required to compensate deviations in
positioning the needle assembly and the sample tray. The auto referencing is
required after disassembling the system or when you exchange the sample
handler, the sample hotel, the needle parkstation, the needle assembly or one of
the main boards. This function is implemented in the drawer detection and in the
needle exchange routine.
When After disassembling the module or an exchange of the needle assembly.
Preparations • Workspace of the multisampler is empty

• All drawers are closed properly
• All drawers have two sample trays installed, but no sample containers
• All drawers have been properly configured
• Needle assembly is installed in the needle parkstation

Auto Referencing
1 Open the CDS of the instrument.

A right-click into the Active Area of the Multisampler will open a menu to
modify
• drawer configuration
• capillaries
• Reference Vial Bar
2 Use drawer configuration and follow the software instructions.

Auto referencing is done.
3 Click the Back button to leave the Service & Diagnosis menu.
For auto referencing, you can alternatively use the Local Controller.
NOTE
For resetting the auto reference point you can use the clear data function in Lab
NOTE Advisor (FSE). After erasing the values you have to start auto referencing again.

Maintenance Positions
Some maintenance procedures require the needle assembly, the sample loop
flex, the metering device and the needle seat to be moved to specific positions to
enable easy access to components. The maintenance functions move these
assemblies into the appropriate maintenance position. In the Agilent Lab Advisor
Software the maintenance positions can be selected in the Service & Diagnostics
view.
When Performing maintenance on the module
1 Run the Maintenance Positions in the Service & Diagnostics View in the Agilent
Lab Advisor (for further information see Online-Help of user interface).
Figure 47 Maintenance Positions

Change Needle Assembly

The Sample handler is positioning the needle assembly so that there is easy
access for changing needle assembly or needle seat. The position is far to the
left of the needle parkstation, and the current to the motors are off, so that the
Z-drive of the robot can be moved while servicing the module.
For safety reason you have to lock the needle assembly before you detach the
NOTE needle from the robot. Refer to “Remove the Needle Assembly” on page 252 and
“Install the Needle Assembly” on page 257.
During normal operation the needle assembly has to be unlocked.

NOTE
Figure 48 Change Needle Asssembly

Change Sample Loop Capillary

The Change Loop command positions the Z-drive of the robotarm far to the left of
the needle parkstation to enable easy exchange of the sample loop cartridge.
Figure 49 Change Sample Loop Capillary
Arm Position
The home position of the multisampler ensures a better access to the
workspace. When transporting the module it is highly recommended to use the
Instrument Control > Park Position command, in order to place the Sample
Handler in a position for safe transport.
Figure 50 Park Position Button
If the transport assembly is not parked and not protected by the transport foam,
NOTE the module could be damaged due to excessive shock of the shipping container
during transport.

Change Metering Device

When removing the metering device is necessary (by exchanging the metering
seal for instance), the metering drive needs to be moved to a position at the far
back, in order to prevent seal and/or piston damage.
Figure 51 Change Metering Device

Injector Steps
Injector Steps
Each movement of the sampling sequence can be done under manual control.
This is useful during troubleshooting, where close observation of each of the
sampling steps is required to confirm a specific failure mode or verify successful
completion of a repair. Each injector step command actually consists of a series
of individual commands that move the multisampler components to predefined
positions, enabling the specific step to be done.
1 Run the Injector Steps in the Service & Diagnostics View in the Agilent Lab
Advisor (for further information see Online-Help of user interface).

Injector Steps
2 Select the individual step command like needle selection and needle position
(for further information see Online-Help of user interface).
Follow a logical order to use the injector steps function.

NOTE

Sample Cooler Function Test
Sample Cooler Function Test
The Sample Cooler Function Test is a diagnostic test to verify the correct
functioning of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat. The test takes up to
15 min to complete and returns a pass/fail type result. If the test failed or was
aborted by the system, the final report will include some information on the
possible root causes.
Before the test starts, the compressor is turned off to allow the system to reach
the initial conditions. The test starts with acquiring data from the evaporator
temperature sensor. If the reading is stable for at least 10 s (T < 0.5 °C), the
compressor turns on and the temperature inside the cooler/thermostat starts to
drop.
For the test to succeed, the system must pass three temperature checkpoints in
a timely manner. These checkpoints are the following:
• Checkpoint 1: The temperature drops by 1/3 of the difference between the
starting temperature and 5 °C.
• Checkpoint 2: The temperature drops below 5 °C.
• Checkpoint 3: The temperature stabilizes at a value below 5 °C and stays
stable for at least 60 s (T < 1.0 °C).
For a Sample Thermostat, the heater resistance of the heating elements will also
be tested and checked if the measured value is within the acceptance range
(5 – 9 Ohm).
For testing the heater resistance of the Sample Thermostat, Lab Advisor version
NOTE B.02.11 or higher is needed.

Sample Handler Function Test
Sample Handler Function Test
The Sample Handler Function Test is designed to check that the Multisampler's
sample handler unit operates as expected. The test collects current and position
signals, while the arm moves around in different directions. The collected data is
then compared with built-in limits to verify whether the sample handler is
defective.
The Result screen shows the result of the test as Passed or Failed. In the case of
an error, a reason for the error, together with a comment, are displayed.
When In case of failed auto referencing or errors related to the sample handler
Preparations • Workspace of the multisampler is empty

• All drawers are closed properly
• All drawers have two sample trays installed, but no sample containers
• Needle assembly is installed in the needle parkstation
• Pumps are turned off
1 Run the Sample Handler Function Test with the Agilent Lab Advisor (for further
information see Online-Help of user interface).
The test can only start once all boxes have been checked.
2 Click the Back button to leave the Service & Diagnostics menu.

Sampler Leak Test
Sampler Leak Test
The Sampler Leak Test determines the specific leak rates of injection valve,
metering device, needle/seat, and system. The test requires that a blank nut gets
installed at port 6 (outlet) of the injection valve. The test allows for setting the
pressure at which it should be performed, and it is recommended to use a
pressure that corresponds to the normal operation of the system.
The test proceeds as follows:
1 A pump head leak test is carried out on the selected channel.
2 A Pressure Test is carried out in the bypass position.
3 A Pressure Test is carried out in the main pass position.
4 A Pressure Test is carried out in the main pass position with the needle at the
blocked seat position.
The values obtained are then used to calculate the injection valve, metering
device, and needle/seat leak rates.
At the end of the test, the results are evaluated automatically.
When • In case of a suspected leak

• To verify successful execution of maintenance

5067-6127 Blank Nut SL
5043-0277 Blank nut long 10-32, PEEK with stainless steel core
Preparations Place a bottle of solvent in the channel that shall be tested. The type of solvent is not important.
1 Run the Sampler Leak Test with the Agilent LabAdvisor and follow the
provided instructions.
The Sampler Leak Test is only available for Standard or Multiwash Multisamplers.
NOTE For Dual-Needle Multisamplers, perform the System Pressure Test instead.

Introduction to Maintenance 242

Overview of Maintenance 247
Clean the Module 248
Removal and Installation of the Front Door 249
Remove the Needle Assembly 252
Install the Needle Assembly 257
Exchange the Needle Seat 261
Replace the Rotor Seal 264
Replace the Injection Valve 270
Remove the Metering Seal 275
Install the Metering Seal 280
Replace the Peristaltic Pump Cartridge 286
Replace the Flushhead Seal 289
Remove the Sample Loop-Flex 293
Installing the Sample Loop-Flex 297
Replace the Dummy Drawer 301
Optional Configurations 301
Installing and Replacing of Drawers (Upgrade Drawer Kit) 302
Configuration of the Hotel Drawers 306
Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 309
Introduction to Repair 314
Replace Analytical Heads/Metering Device 315
Exchange the Mainboard Fuses 320
Assemble the Main Cover 322
Remove the Main Cover and Top Plates 323
Install the Top Plates and Main Cover 325
Remove and Reinstall the Sample Handler 327
Checking the Belt Tension 331

Sampler Leak Test
Replace the Sample Hotel 333

Replace the Hydraulic Box 336
Disassemble and Reassemble Inner Parts of the Hydraulic Box 339
Disassemble and Reassemble the Electronical Box 342
Replace the Fusion Board 348
Replace the Needle Port Assembly 349
Add Needle Port Assembly 353
Replace the Power Switch 357
Disassemble and Reassemble the Door Mechanism 359
Replace the Module Firmware 362
Changing the Type and Serial Number 363
Recover Instructions 365
Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Repair 368
Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover 371
Remove the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover 372
Overview of Main Assemblies 373
Replace the Connector Compressor Assembly 377
Remove the Refrigerating Assembly 382
Replace the Condensate/Leak Sensor 384
Replace the Digital Temperature Sensor 388
Replace the Evaporator Fan 393
Install the Refrigerating Assembly 396
Install the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover 397
Install the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover 398
This chapter describes the maintenance and repair of the Multisampler.

Introduction to Maintenance
Figure 52 on page 242 shows the main user accessible assemblies of the
multisampler. These parts can be accessed from the front (simple repairs) and
don't require to remove the multisampler from the system stack.
Door
Peristaltic pump
Metering device
Dummy drawer
Needle assembly
Drawer
Needle seat
Injection valve
Figure 52 Main user accessible assemblies (standard)

Door
SSV/piezo pump
Flush head
Metering device
Dummy drawer
Needle assembly
Drawer
Needle seat
Injection valve
Figure 53 Main user accessible assemblies (multiwash)
Sample container
(vial tray)
Sample container
(wellplate)
Drawer
Sample tray
Figure 54 Overview of drawer, sample tray and sample container

Warnings and Cautions
Personal injury or damage to the product

WAR N IN G
Agilent is not responsible for any damages caused, in whole or in part, by
improper use of the products, unauthorized alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the products, failure to comply with procedures in Agilent
product user guides, or use of the products in violation of applicable laws,
rules or regulations.
 Use your Agilent products only in the manner described in the Agilent
product user guides.
Module is partially energized when switched off, as long as the power cord
WAR N IN G
is plugged in.
Repair work at the module can lead to personal injuries, e.g. shock hazard,
when the cover is opened and the module is connected to power.
 Make sure that it is always possible to access the power plug.
 Remove the power cable from the instrument before opening the cover.
 Do not connect the power cable to the Instrument while the covers are
removed.
Sharp metal edges

WAR N IN G
Sharp-edged parts of the equipment may cause injuries.
 To prevent personal injury, be careful when getting in contact with sharp
metal areas.


WAR N IN G
risks.
 The volume of substances should be reduced to the minimum required
for the analysis.
Electronic boards and components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge

C AU T I O N (ESD).
ESD can damage electronic boards and components.
 Be sure to hold the board by the edges, and do not touch the electrical
components. Always use ESD protection (for example, an ESD wrist strap)
when handling electronic boards and components.

C AU T I O N (ESD).
 To prevent accidental electrostatic discharge when coming into contact
with components inside the instrument, touch one of the metal housing
panels at the front of the instrument.
Safety standards for external equipment

C AU T I O N
 If you connect external equipment to the instrument, make sure that you
only use accessory units tested and approved according to the safety
standards appropriate for the type of external equipment.

Heavy weight
WAR N IN G
objects.
Sample degradation and contamination of the instrument

C AU T I O N
Metal parts in the flow path can interact with the bio-molecules in the sample
leading to sample degradation and contamination.
 For bio applications, always use dedicated bio parts, which can be identified
by the bio-inert symbol or other markers described in this manual.
 Do not mix bio, and non-bio modules or parts in a bio system.

Overview of Maintenance
Overview of Maintenance
It is necessary to perform periodic inspection of this instrument to ensure its safe

use. It is possible to have these periodic inspections performed by Agilent service
representatives on a contractual basis. For information regarding the
maintenance inspection contract, contact your Agilent representative.
The following pages describe the maintenance (simple repairs) of the module
that can be carried out without opening the main cover.
Table 36 Overview of maintenance
Procedure Typical interval
Change needle/needle seat 30000 needle into seat movements
Change peristaltic pump cartridge 3000 h on time
Change rotor seal:
• G7167A/G5668A (800 bar) 30000 injections
• G7167B/G7137A (1300 bar) As needed (minimum 10000 injections)
Change metering seal 30000 injections

Clean the Module
Clean the Module
To keep the module case clean, use a soft cloth slightly dampened with water, or
a solution of water and mild detergent. Avoid using organic solvents for cleaning
purposes. They can cause damage to plastic parts.
Liquid dripping into the electronic compartment of your module can cause
WAR N IN G
shock hazard and damage the module
 Do not use an excessively damp cloth during cleaning.
 Drain all solvent lines before opening any connections in the flow path.
A solution of 70 % isopropanol and 30 % water might be used if the surface of the

NOTE module needs to be disinfected.

Removal and Installation of the Front Door
When The instrument doors or the hinges are broken.
Tools required Description

Flat screwdriver

1 5067-5415 Door Assy
OR 1 G7167-68718 Light Protection Kit
Preparations Finish any pending acquisition job and return any plate on the workspace back to the hotel.
For detailed information on position of the magnets, refer to “Magnets” on

NOTE page 79
Magnetic fields
C AU T I O N
Magnets produce a far-reaching, strong magnetic field.
You can damage for example televisions, laptops, computer harddisks, credit
cards, magnetic cards may be damaged as well.
 Keep magnets at least 25 mm away from devices and objects that could be
damaged by strong magnetic fields.
Heart pacemakers
WAR N IN G
Magnets could affect the functioning of pacemakers and implanted heart
defibrillators.
A pacemaker could switch into test mode and cause illness.
A heart defibrillator may stop working.
 Bearers of heart pacemakers or implanted defibrillators must stay off at
least 55 mm from the magnets.

1 Open the front door. 2 Press the release buttons and pull the front door out.

3 For the Installation of the front door. Insert the hinges

into their guides and move the door in until the release
buttons click into their final position.

Remove the Needle Assembly
For bio-inert modules use bio-inert parts only!
For 1290 Infinity II Bio LC modules, use bio / bio-compatible parts only.
Do not mix parts between 1260 Infinity II Bio-Inert LC modules and 1290 Infinity II Bio LC modules.
When • The needle is visibly damaged.

• Leaks or blockages are observed.
• The limit for the needle interaction EMF counter is exceeded.
• The needle needs to be replaced as part of the yearly maintenance.


1 G4267-87201 Needle Assembly
OR 1 G4267-87210 Needle Assembly (slotted) for high injection volumes
1 G5668-87200 Needle Bio-Sampler
(for G5668A)
1 G7137-87201 Needle Bio-compatible
(for G7137A)
Preparations • Finish any pending acquisition job.

• Stop the flow at the pump and remove the solvent lines from the eluent bottles to avoid spilling
solvent.
• Close the shutoff valves at the pump if available.


WAR N IN G

WAR N IN G
risks.
It is recommended to always exchange the needle assembly and the needle seat
NOTE at the same time to prevent premature leakage.
1 In the Agilent Lab Advisor software select Service & 2 Open the front door.
Diagnostics > Maintenance Positions > Change Needle,
Loop and Seat, click Start and wait until the needle
assembly is in maintenance position.
OR
In the Local Controller start the maintenance mode and
select Change Needle, Loop and Seat function.

3 Lock the needle in the safety position.

WAR N IN G
Sharp needle
Uncovered needles may cause injuries
 Make sure the needle is in the safety lock position.

4 Remove the needle assembly by slightly pulling the nee-
dle cartridge.
NOTE
During normal operation of the Multisampler the needle
assembly has to be unlocked.

5
C AU T I O N
Z-Robot (Z-arm coupler) without the needle assembly.
Damage of the loop
The loop shape may be damaged if the loop is stretched or
bent too far.
 Avoid to change the loop shape.
 Do not pull or bend the loop too far.

6 The needle assembly is still connected to the loop capil-
lary.
Loop plastic adapter

7 Remove the loop plastic adapter. 8 Use a 1/4 inch wrench to loosen the fitting of the loop
capillary.
(1.)
(2.)
(4.)
(3.)
NOTE
Do not open the rear plastic clamp.
NOTE
If the plastic adapter is damaged the sample loop has to be
replaced.
9 Remove the needle assembly.

Install the Needle Assembly
When • The needle is visibly damaged.

• The limit for the needle interaction EMF counter is exceeded.
• The needle needs to be replaced as part of the yearly maintenance.


1 G4267-87201 Needle Assembly
OR 1 G4267-87210 Needle Assembly (slotted) for high injection volumes
1 G5668-87200 Needle Bio-Sampler
(for G5668A)
1 G7137-87201 Needle Bio-compatible
(for G7137A)

solvent.


WAR N IN G
It is recommended to always exchange the needle assembly and the needle seat
NOTE at the same time to prevent premature leakage.
1 Install the loop capillary on top of the needle cartridge

(1.) and tighten the fitting hand tight (2.). C AU T I O N
Blockages inside of the needle assembly union
 Do not overtighten the fitting. A quarter turn should be

sufficient.
2 Use a 1/4 inch wrench to tighten the fitting of the loop
capillary.
2. 1.
NOTE
If the sample loop is changed, we recommend changing the
needle as well.

3 Install loop plastic adapter. 4 Pinch and reinsert the needle assembly and the con-
nected loop capillary into the z-arm coupler.
NOTE
Check the tension of the loop capillary. This must be forced
1. and guided to the hydraulic box to prevent it from being
caught by the Z-drive.
2.
4.
3.
NOTE
Verify the sample loop info on the plastic adapter. A left or a
right sample loop must be installed in the correct slot of the
needle parkstation. For single needle, the default position is
on the right.
NOTE
replaced.

5 Close the front door. Next Steps:
6 In the Local Controller close Change needle /seat.

OR
In the Agilent Lab Advisor software Change
needle/loop > End, click End and wait until the needle
assembly is in the needle park station.
7 Perform a Pressure Test.

Exchange the Needle Seat
When When seat is visibly damaged, blocked or leaks.

Flat head screwdriver

1 G4267-87012 High Pressure Needle Seat, 0.12 mm (PEEK)
OR 1 G4267-87020 High Pressure Seat Assembly 0.075 mm (PEEK)
OR 1 G5668-87017 Bio Seat ID 0.17
(for G5668A)
1 G7137-87012 High pressure seat assembly 0.12 mm Bio-compatible
(for G7137A)

solvent.


WAR N IN G
Refer the Agilent 1290 Infinity II Ultra Low Dispersion Kit Technical Note (p/n
NOTE 01200-90105) for further details.
1 In the Local Controller start the maintenance mode and 2 Open the front door.
select Change needle/seat function.
OR
In the Agilent Lab Advisor software select Service &
Diagnostics in the system screen Maintenance
Positions > Change Needle, click Start and wait until the
needle assembly is in maintenance position.
3 Disconnect the seat capillary from the Injection valve. 4 Slightly pull (1.) the front clip which holds the needle
seat in position. Then carefully lift up (2.) the complete
leak tube needle assembly from the holder.
2.
1.

5 Insert the new Needle seat (1.). Press it firmly in posi- 6 Reconnect the seat capillary to the injection valve.
tion (2.).
NOTE
Verify that the needle seat clip is locked in the needle park
station.
2.
1.

OR
In the Agilent Lab Advisor software Change needle click
End and wait until the needle assembly is in the needle
park position.
Always flush the sampler with fresh solvent and perform a pressure test before
NOTE using the Auto Clean or Prime function after exchanging a needle seat.

Replace the Rotor Seal
When • Injection volume reproducibility problems are observed.

• The limit for the rotor seal EMF counter is exceeded.
• The rotor seal needs to be replaced as part of the yearly maintenance.

8710-2394 Hex key 9/64 inch 15 cm long T-handle
Cleaning tissue and appropriate solvent like isopropanol or methanol

1 5068-0198 Rotor Seal 1300 bar (PEEK)
for 1290 Infinity II Injection Valve
1 5068-0209 Rotor Seal (PEEK)
for 1260 Infinity II Injection Valve and Bio-inert injection valve
for 3Pos/6Port Peripheral Valve Dual Needle
for 2Pos/8Port Injection Valve Dual Needle
for 1290 Infinity II Bio Injection valve

Reduced life time of the injection valve

C AU T I O N
Component cleanliness is crucial for the life time of the injection valve.
 Replace the rotor seal in a clean environment.
Please bear in mind that depending on which valve you have installed the images
NOTE may slightly differ from the actual item.
1 Open the front door. 2 Remove all capillaries from the injection valve with a
1/4 inch wrench.
NOTE
Remember the correct plumbing.
Check the drawing on the side cover of the hydraulic box for
correct plumbing.

3 Use a 9/64 inch hex driver to unscrew the two socket

screws which hold the stator head in place. C AU T I O N
Damage to the stator head
The polished sealing surface of the stator head contains
six ports that access handling can easily damage.
 Avoid touching the polished surface of the stator head.
 Never place the polished surface on a hard surface.

4 Carefully remove the stator head. To ensure that the
sealing surface of the stator head is not damaged, place
it on its outer face.

5 Remove the rotor seal.

C AU T I O N
Damage to the rotor seal and cross-port leaks
 Before you replace the rotor seal, clean the stator.
 Inspect the stator head and swab it with the appropri-

ate solvent. If more stringent cleaning is required, use
a sonicator. Inspect the remaining valve components
for contamination. Clean them as necessary.
 If the stator head is scratched, replace it.

6 Install new rotor seal.
NOTE
Remove the rotor seal with a small tool, gently pry the rotor
seal away from the drive.
Examine the rotor sealing surface for scratches and nicks.
• If scratches are visible the rotor seal must be replaced.
• If no scratches are visible clean all the parts with an

appropriate solvent, taking care that no surfaces get
scratched.
NOTE
Make sure that the rotor sealing surface with its engraved
flow passages is facing out. The pattern is asymmetrical to
prevent improper placement.
NOTE
The Bio-inert injection valve additionally has a stator face
installed.

7 Reinstall the stator head. The index pins on the drive 8 Using a 9/64 in. L-Hex wrench, tighten each screw gen-
and the stator head must engage in the corresponding tly until you feel resistance (approximately fingertight).
holes. Insert the two socket head screws. Tighten each screw by 1/8 turn, and then tighten each
screw again, until the stator is secured to the driver.
NOTE
Do not over-tighten the screws. The screws hold the assem-
bly together and do not affect the sealing force. The sealing
force is automatically set as the screws close the stator
head against the valve body.

9 Reconnect all capillaries to the proper injection valve 10 Close the front door.
ports with a 1/4 inch wrench

Replace the Injection Valve
When Add new injection valve or replace defective injection valve.

Wrench 9/64

1 5067-4232 2-position/6-port Injection Valve (VICI) 1300 bar
1300 bar (G7167B)
1 5067-6698 2-position/6-port RC Injection Valve
800 bar (G7167A)
1 5067-4260 2-position/8-port Injection Valve Dual Needle 1300 bar
1 5067-4263 2-position/6-port Injection Valve Bio-inert 600 bar
for bio inert solution
1 5067-6739 2-position/6-port injection valve Bio 1300 bar
(G7137A)
Preparations Switch off the power of the Multisampler
Please bear in mind that depending on which valve you have installed the images
NOTE may slightly differ from the actual item.

1 Disconnect the capillaries. 2 Turn the spanner nut counter clockwise until the injec-
tion valve head detaches from the hydraulic box (Do not
use wrenches on the spanner nut).

3 Remove the spanner nut from the injection valve head. 4 Take the replacment injection valve head and insert it
into the open actuator slot of the hydraulic box. Rotate
until the unions at the base of the replacement injection
valve head and the valve actuator engage
OR
If the outside pin does not fit into the outside groove, you
have to turn the valve head until you feel that the two pins
snap into the grooves. Now you should feel additional resis-
tance from the valve drive while continue turning the valve
head until the pin fits into the groove.
NOTE
Check the orientation of the rear side.
Verify the correct position of the Valve TAG.

5 Continue to rotate until the clocking pin in the injection 6 Replace the spanner nut (1.) and tighten clockwise (2.)
valve head align with the notch in the housing and press (Hand tighten only, do not use wrenches on the spanner
the replacement injection valve head into the actuator. nut).
(2.)
(1.)

7 Reconnect the capillaries

Remove the Metering Seal
When When poor injection volume reproducibility or when metering device / analytical head is leaking.

8710-2392 4 mm Hex key
01018-23702 Insert tool
OR G4226-43800 Seal insert tool
for 100 µL or 40 µL

1 0905-1717 Metering Seal, 40 µL
1 G5611-21503 Metering Seal PTFE (Bio-inert)
1 G7137-20003 Metering seal 1290 Bio 2 mm piston, 40 µL
1 5067-5920 Piston, 40 µL, Zirconia
If previous piston is scratched (for 40 µL analytical head)
1 G4267-60462 Piston, 900 µL, Sapphire

select Change metering device function.
OR
Diagnostics in the system screen (Tools) > Maintenance
Positions > Change Metering Device, click start and wait
until the metering device is in maintenance position.
3 Disconnect all capillaries from the metering device. 4 To release the bayonet lock, push (1.) and rotate (2.) the
analytical head a quarter left. Then you can pull and
detach the analytical head assembly from the actuator
(3.).
3.
2.
1.

5 Remove the metering device. 6 Take the metering device. Push against the rear side of
the metering device and rotate a quarter left to release
the bayonet lock.
7 Now you can separate the analytical head and head 8 Remove the piston out of the head body.
body.

9 Inspect the piston for cleanliness and scratches. 10 Take the analytical head and remove the three screws
on the rear side, which holds the support ring in place.
Check the support ring for any damages.
• If dirty:
Clean the piston with an appropriate solvent.
• If scratched:
Replace the piston by a new one.

11 Carefully remove the metering seal using the steel side

of the insert tool. Clean the chamber with an appropri-
ate solvent and ensure that all particulate matter is
removed.

Install the Metering Seal
When After removing the metering seal.

8710-2392 4 mm Hex key
01018-23702 Insert tool
(for 100 µL seals)
OR G4226-43800 Seal insert tool
(for 40 µL seals)
Cleaning tissue and appropriate solvent like isopropanol or methanol

Preparations Removing the metering seal, see “Remove the Metering Seal” on page 275

1 Install the new metering seal using the plastic side of 2 Reassemble the support ring.
the insert tool. Press it firmly into position. Avoid any
offset angle as it might deform the seal.

3 Make sure to comply to the following order of actions: 4 Use the twist and lock bayonet mechanims to reassem-
a Tighten the three screws fingerthight, then ble the analytical head assembly. Push the two parts
b Tighten the screws a little at a time to keep the sup- together to couple the head body with the analytical
port ring surface parallel (important!) to the surface head. Once the pin reaches the bottom of the slot, one
of the analytical head. or both parts are rotated so that the pin slides along the
horizontal arm of the L until it reaches the serif. The
spring then pushes the male connector up into the serif
to keep the pin locked into place.

5 Press the piston carefully into the housing of the head 6 Reinstall the complete analytical head with the actuator
body and the seal. housing
NOTE
For proper installation, check the correct position of the tag.

7 Fix the analytical head by pushing (1.) and rotating (2.) 8 Reconnect the capillaries.
via twist and lock bayonet mechanism.
1.
2.

10 In the Local Controller exit the maintenance mode and

OR
In Agilent Lab Advisor software system screen exit Ser-
vice & Diagnostics (Tools) > Maintenance Positions >
Change Metering Device click End and wait until the
metering device is in Home position.

Replace the Peristaltic Pump Cartridge
When • The tubing is blocked or damaged

• The peristaltic cartridge needs to be replaced as part of the yearly maintenance.

1 5065-4445 Peristaltic pump with PharMed tubing
(default)
OR 1 5042-8507 Peristaltic pump cartridge, silicone tubing
OR 1 5065-9952 Peristaltic pump with Chemsure tubing

• Remove the solvent line from the wash bottle to avoid spilling solvent.
When opening capillary or tube fittings solvents may leak out.

WAR N IN G
The handling of toxic and hazardous solvents and reagents can hold health
risks.
 Please observe appropriate safety procedures (for example, goggles,
safety gloves and protective clothing) as described in the material
handling and safety data sheet supplied by the solvent vendor,
especially when toxic or hazardous solvents are used.
The peristaltic pump cartridge is a replaceable unit. The tubing inside the pump
NOTE is not replaceable.

1 Open the front door. 2 Press the two clips on the front of the peristaltic pump
cartridge.
3 Pull the cartridge forward off the motor shaft. 4 Disconnect the tubing coupler leading to the wash port
and the tubing coupler coming from the solvent bottle.
5 Push the new cartridge onto the motor shaft until the 6 Connect the wash port tubing to the upper tubing of the
clips click into place. new cartridge (use sand paper to get a good grip on the
tubing).

7 Connect the inlet filter of the solvent bottle again. Use 8 Close the front door.
the syringe to draw enough solvent for completely filling
of the peristaltic pump tubing before continuing to
prime the peristaltic pump.

Replace the Flushhead Seal
When Flush head is leaking

8710-2392 Hex key 4 mm15 cm long T-handle

5067-5918 Flush Head Seal 500 µL
G5668-60494 Seal 500 µL Bio
Preparations • Cleaning tissue

• Appropriate solvent like isopropanol or methanol
OR
Positions > Change Metering Device, click start and wait

3 Remove capillaries and valves from the flush head. 4 Press and turn the Flush Head a quarter left (bayonet fit-
ting) and detach the metering device from the actuator.
3.
2.
1.
5 Pull the flush head away from the hydraulic box 6 Press against the rear side of flush head and turn a
quarter left (bayonet fitting) and separate the flush
head, head body and the piston.
3. 2.
1.
NOTE
Be careful not to break the piston.

7 Remove the piston from the head body. 8 Carefully remove the metering seal from the tip of the
piston.
Seal
9 Reassemble the flush head and the head body (without 10 Carefully insert the piston with the new metering seal
piston). into the flush head assembly.
2.
1.
Seal
3.

11 Reinstall the flush head to the actuator housing. 12 Fix the flush head.
NOTE
13 Connect the capillaries. 14 Close the front door.

Remove the Sample Loop-Flex
When If the sample loop flex is defective or damaged.


G4267-60300 Sample Loop Flex 20 µL, right (red coded)
G4267-60400 Sample Loop Flex 40 µL, right (green coded)
G4267-60500 Sample Loop Flex 100 µL, right (blue coded)
G7167-68500 Sample Loop Cartridge 500 µL right
G5668-60500 Bio-inert Sample Loop 100 µL
(for G5668A)
G7137-60300 Sample Loop MP35N 20 µL, right (red/orange coded)
Further sample loops for the Dual Needle option are available, see “Sample Loops
and Capillaries (Dual Needle)” on page 426.


WAR N IN G
1 In the Agilent Lab Advisor software select Service & 2 Open the front door.
Diagnostics > Maintenance Positions > Change Needle,
Loop and Seat, click Start and wait until the needle
assembly is in maintenance position.
OR
In the Local Controller start the maintenance mode and
select Change Needle, Loop and Seat function.
3 The needle assembly is still connected to the loop capil- 4 Lock the needle in the safety position.
lary. Use a 1/4 inch wrench to loosen the fitting of the
loop capillary connected to the analytical head.
NOTE
During normal operation of the Multisampler the needle
assembly has to be unlocked.

6 Remove the cartridge out of its proper position. By gen-

C AU T I O N tly tilting and pulling it out of the work space of the mul-
Damage of the loop tisampler.
The loop shape may be damaged if the loop is stretched or
bent too far.
 Avoid to change the loop shape.
 Do not pull or bend the loop too far.

WAR N IN G
Sharp needle
Uncovered needles may cause injuries
 Make sure the needle is in the safety lock position.

5 Remove the needle assembly by slightly pulling the nee-
dle cartridge.

7 Remove the loop plastic adapter. 8 Use a 1/4 inch wrench to loosen the fitting of the loop
capillary.
(1.)
(2.)
(4.)
(3.)
NOTE
Do not open the rear plastic clamp.
NOTE
replaced.
9 Remove the needle assembly.

Installing the Sample Loop-Flex
When If the sample loop flex is defective or damaged.


(for G5668A)
Further sample loops for the Dual Needle option are available, see “Sample Loops
and Capillaries (Dual Needle)” on page 426.


WAR N IN G
Mismatching sample loop configuration

C AU T I O N
Damage to the system
 Make sure, that the sample loop configuration matches to the hardware
installed.
If you have changed the sample loop, verify that the correct sample loop is
NOTE configured in the CDS (see “Setting up the Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab
CDS ChemStation Edition” on page 148).
For details on the setup of the dual-needle system, see“Modify Capillaries” on

NOTE page 158.
1 Install the loop capillary on top of the needle cartridge

(1.) and tighten the fitting hand tight (2.). C AU T I O N
Blockages inside of the needle assembly union
 Do not overtighten the fitting. A quarter turn should be

sufficient.
2 Then use a 1/4 inch wrench to tighten the fitting of the
loop capillary.
2. 1.
NOTE
If the sample loop is changed, we recommend changing the
needle as well.

3 Install loop plastic adapter. 4 Click the sample loop cartridge in the designated loca-
tion and keep the right orientation.
1.
2.
4.
3.
NOTE
Verify the sample loop info on the plastic adapter. A left or a
right sample loop must be installed in the correct slot of the
needle parkstation. For single needle, the default position is
on the right.
NOTE
replaced.

5 Install the shorter capillary of the sample loop cartridge 6 Pinch and reinsert the needle assembly and the con-
to the analytical head. nected sample loop capillary into the z- arm coupler.
NOTE
Check the tension of the loop capillary. This must be forced
and guided to the hydraulic box to prevent it from being
caught by the Z-drive.

OR
In Agilent Lab Advisor software Change needle/loop.
Click NEXT and wait until the needle is in the needle park
station.
Click Back to leave the Maintenance window.
NOTE
If you need an autoreferencing step included you must
choose the change needle procedure
NOTE
If you have changed the sample loop, verify that the correct
sample loop is configured in the CDS (see “Setting up the
Autosampler with Agilent OpenLab CDS ChemStation
Edition” on page 148).

Replace the Dummy Drawer
Optional Configurations
Table 37 Overview on optional configurations (examples for uniform types)
1H 2H 3H Dummy-Drawer
Delivery Status - G7167-60020 - G4267-60024

1x 3x
Up to 8 single height drawers G7167-60021 - - -

16 positions Shallow well- 8x
plates and MTP
Max Sample capacity 1536 /
6144 samples (96 Shallow
Wellplates / 384 MTP)
Up to 4 Dual Height drawers - G7167-60020 - -

8 positions Vials (2 mL), deep 4x
well plates, MTP, Eppendorf
3072 samples (2 mL Vials/
384 MTP)
Up to 2 Drawers Triple Height - G7167-60020 G7167-60022 -

4 positions (2H or 2*1H option 1x 2x
left over) Vials (6 ml), deep well
plates, MTP, Eppendorf
216/ 1536 samples (6 mL
Vials/ 2 mL Vials/ 384 MTP)
Mixed configurations are possible (for example 1x3H- with 1x2H- and
NOTE 3x1H-drawer).
All positions in the Sample Hotel must be filled either with dummies or drawers.
The drawers must be installed from bottom to top.

Installing and Replacing of Drawers (Upgrade Drawer Kit)

Screwdriver

G7167-60020 Drawer 2H
G7167-60021 Drawer 1H
G7167-60022 Drawer 3H
Before you start the new drawer installation you have to remove the lower drawer
NOTE (2H drawer = default configuration) from the Sample Hotel.
For best cooling performance the 2H drawer must be installed in the lowest
NOTE position.
More detailed video information is available on the Agilent Information Center.

NOTE
1 Open the drawer. 2 Pull the drawer completely out.

3 Unlatch the drawer: Use a screwdriver to press the 4 Remove the drawer from the rail guide.
clamping lever lightly to the left.
The drawer is now out of the hotel.

5 Grab in the recession below the dummy drawer front 6 Remove the dummy drawer.
panel (1.) and lift the left side (2.).
NOTE
At this stage remove all other dummies that will be replaced
by hotel drawers.

7 Place the new drawer horizontally into the sample hotel. 8 Push until the complete drawer locks in place.
Check that the drawer matches the middle bracket of
the sample hotel. NOTE
Take care that the clamping lever locks.
NOTE
Always fill sample hotel completely (no empty drawer slots).
Otherwise the drawers can’t be configured in the software.
9 Configure the hotel drawers in the controller software (see the Online Help of the software for details).

Configuration of the Hotel Drawers

The configuration of your drawers is necessary to detect the new drawer
configuration for your CDS system. When a wrong configuration is detected there
will be a mismatch in your CDS system and you are not able to use the new
drawers. The new drawer configuration is active and stored after you have done
the Drawer Configuration.
Configure the Hotel Drawers in the Control Software
Software required OpenLAB (A.02.01 or above)

LC driver (A.02.10 or above
Preparations • Stop the acquisition run.

• Remove the sample containers (trays and well plates) from workspace.
• Complete the drawer installation.
• Remove the sample containers (trays and well plates) from the drawers.
• Verify that all sample trays (palettes) are installed in their drawers.
• All open drawers and dummies have to be closed and installed properly.
1 Start OpenLAB CDS ChemStation Edition.

2 Right-click on the Multisampler GUI.

3 Select Modify > Drawer Configuration in the GUI screen.
For correct detection, it is necessary to remove all sample containers (for

NOTE example 54 vial tray or well plates).
4 Follow the Setup or Change configuration screen.

5 System is ready after the robot has done Auto Referencing (see “Auto
Referencing” on page 229).

Configure the Hotel Drawers in Lab Advisor
Software required Lab Advisor (B.02.05 or above)
Preparations • Stop the acquisition run.

• Remove the sample containers (trays and well plates) from workspace.
• Complete the drawer installation.
• Remove the sample containers (trays and well plates) from the drawers.
• Verify that all sample trays (palettes) are installed in their drawers.
• All open drawers and dummies have to be closed and installed properly.
1 Start the Lab Advisor Software.

2 Connect the instrument and select Instrument Control in the system screen.
3 Switch In the Configuration menu of the Multisampler. Select Detect Drawers in
the Hotel Configuration.
4 Follow the Detect Hotel Configuration screen to detect the physically available
drawers.
For correct detection, it is necessary to remove all sample containers (for

NOTE example 54 vial tray or well plates).
5 System is ready after the robot has done Auto Referencing (see “Auto
Referencing” on page 229).

Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
When If the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat is damaged or defective (see “Sample Cooler/Sample
Thermostat Repair” on page 368).

(for the Sample Cooler)
(for the Sample Thermostat)

1 G7167-60005 Sample Cooler
OR 1 G7167-60101 Sample Thermostat
WAR N IN G
and laboratory.
Flammable refrigerant used

WAR N IN G
 When handling, installing and operating the Sample Thermostat, care
should be taken to avoid damage to the refrigerant tubing or any part of
the Sample Thermostat.


WAR N IN G
Heavy weight
WAR N IN G
objects.
Routing of the condensation tubing

C AU T I O N
Proper routing of the condensation tubing is critical for correct condensate
drainage.
 Do not place the sampler directly on the bench.
Condensate inside the cooler or thermostat

C AU T I O N
Damage to the electronics
 Unplug the power cords.
 Drain off all condensate before dismounting the sample cooler or
thermostat.
 Make sure that there is no condensate left.

1 Ensure that the power switch on the front of the module 2 Disconnect the power cable from the sampler.
is OFF (switch stands out).
3 Ensure that no condensate remains inside the 4 Remove the condensate tubing.
cooler/thermostat before proceeding forward.
NOTE
Gently tapping on the sides of the sampler can help to
remove the last traces of condensate from the system.
NOTE
If there is still some condensate inside the cooler/thermo-
stat, place a suitable container underneath the outlet pipe
and keep tapping on the sides of the sampler until no water
is coming out.
5 Remove the fixation screws on the back of Sample 6 Pull the cooler/thermostat halfway out, disconnect the
Cooler/Sample Thermostat. power and the data cable and then remove the unit
completely from the sampler.

7 Slide the new cooler/thermostat halfway into the sam-

pler and connect the power and the data cable. C AU T I O N
Damage to the cables
 Do not bend or pinch the cables.
 Make sure that the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat

fits perfectly in the sampler.
8 Slide the cooler/thermostat all the way into the sampler,
making sure that the cables don’t get jammed between
the metal parts.
9 Fix the unit with the four screws. 10 Reconnect the condensate tubing.
NOTE
For information on proper condensate handling, see “Install
the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat” on page 87

11 Connect the power cable to the power connector at the

rear of the module. C AU T I O N


reach equilibrium.
12 Switch on the sampler and perform the Sample Cooler
Function Test to verify the correct functioning of the new
cooler/thermostat (see “Sample Cooler Function
Test” on page 237).

Introduction to Repair
Introduction to Repair
Repairs may require the exchange of defective internal parts. Exchange of these
parts requires removing the module from the stack, removing the covers, and
disassembling the module.
Repair and service activities should only be performed by trained and authorized
NOTE service personnel.

Replace Analytical Heads/Metering Device


1 G4267-60042 Analytical Head, 40 µL
OR 1 G4267-60043 Analytical Head, 100 µL
OR 1 G4267-60046 Analytical head, 900 µL, 400 bar
OR 1 G5668-60043 Bio-Inert Analytical Head 100 µL
1 G7137-60042 Bio-compatible head 40 µL
Installing a 900 µL metering device increases the load on the drive mechanism
C AU T I O N
 The maximum system pressure is limited to 400 bar (5801 psi).
If the Sampler with a 900 µL metering device is linked to a 1260 Infinity II pump
NOTE (for example, a G7112B Binary Pump), the pressure limit has to be set manually
in the method parameter settings of the pump. Please refer to the user
documentation of the respective pump for further details.
For 1290 Infinity II High Speed Pumps, and for the 1260 and 1290 Infinity II
Flexible Pumps, the pressure limit will be set automatically.

select Change Metering Device function.
OR
Positions > Change Metering Device, click Start and wait
3 Disconnect all capillaries from the metering device. 4 To release the bayonet lock, push (1.) and rotate (2.) the
analytical head a quarter left. Then you can pull and
detach the analytical head assembly from the actuator
(3.).
3.
2.
1.

5 Remove the metering device. 6 Reinstall the complete analytical head with the actuator
housing
NOTE

7 Fix the analytical head by pushing (1.) and rotating (2.) 8 Reconnect the capillaries.
via twist and lock bayonet mechanism.
1.
2.

10 In the Local Controller exit the maintenance mode and

OR
In Agilent Lab Advisor software system screen exit Ser-
vice & Diagnostics (Tools) > Maintenance Positions >
Change Metering Device click End and wait until the
metering device is in Home position.

Exchange the Mainboard Fuses
A blown fuse is indicated by the corresponding status LED on the electronic

board illuminating red.
There are five exchangeable fuses on the mainboard:
• F2601: 3.5 A fuse for securing the basic electronic components
• When this fuse is blown, the system should be unable to turn on at all.
• F2602: 3.5 A fuse for securing the sample handler
• When this fuse is blown, initialization problems with the sample handler
are to be expected.
• Related error messages: 25121, 25235
• F2603: 3.5 A fuse for securing the hydraulic box
• When this fuse is blown, initialization problems with the hydraulic box and
issues with the leak sensor are to be expected.
• Related error messages: 25122, 25123, 25124, 64, 83
• F2604: 10 A fuse for securing the cooler/thermostat
• When this fuse is blown, problems with the functioning of the Sample
Cooler/Sample Thermostat are to be expected.
• This should be accompanied by a compressor voltage reading being
outside the normal value range (24±1V).
• Related error messages: 30713, 30718, 30724
• F2605: 3.5 A fuse for securing the cooling fans and the condensate sensor
inside the cooler/thermostat:
• When this fuse is blown, the initialization of these components should fail.
• Related error messages: 30719, 30771, 68

When Any of the mainboard fuses are blown.

Flat head screwdriver

OR Pair of tweezers

1 2110-1519 Fuse 3.50 A, 125 V
OR 1 2110-1004 Fuse 10 A, 250 V
Preparations Remove the instrument cover, see “Remove the Main Cover and Top Plates” on page 323.

C AU T I O N (ESD).
1 Locate the fuses on the sampler mainboard. Next Steps:

F2605
F2602 2 Remove the blown fuse with a pair of tweezers or a flat
screwdriver.
F2601
3 Carefully insert the new fuse into the fuse holder.
F2603 4 Reinstall the instrument covers, see “Install the Top
Plates and Main Cover” on page 325.
F2604

Assemble the Main Cover
Assemble the Main Cover
When If broken or defective

G4267-68713 Cabinet Kit
1 Insert the Agilent Technologies 1290 Series name plate 2 Place the top cover on the working bench.
into the recess in the top cover.
3 Press the side panels into the slots in the top cover. 4 Press the front door into the slots in the top cover.

Remove the Main Cover and Top Plates
Preparations • Switch off the module at the main power switch.

• Remove the power cable.
• Remove the module from the stack.
• Remove the front door.
1 Remove the tubing holder insert. 2 Remove the transport protection screw.
3 Release the clips of the cover at the rear of the module. 4 Lift the cover up and slide it to the rear.

5 Loosen the four screws on the top plate. 6 Loosen the screws on the electronic top plate and
remove it.

Install the Top Plates and Main Cover
1 Fix the electronic top plate and top plate with screws. 2 Slide the main cover into its front position.
3 Press the main cover down at the rear until the levers 4 Install the transport protection screw.
click.

5 Install the tubing holder insert. Next Steps:
6 Install the leak interface.

7 Install the doors.

Remove and Reinstall the Sample Handler
When • To adjust the belt tension

• If broken or defective

G4267-60001 Sample Handler Assembly
Preparations • Needle assembly should be positioned in the needle parkstation.

• Switch off the module at the main power switch.
• Remove the power cable.
• Remove the module from the stack.
• Remove the front door and side door.
• Remove the main plastic cover and the electronic box cover.
The connector type can vary, depending on whether a new main board is
NOTE installed or an old one.
The old main board uses black connectors with a push design. The new main
board uses white connectors without push design.

1 Disconnect the four sample handler motor cables care- 2 Lift the sample handler out of the main chassis.
fully from the specific mainboard.
NOTE
Be careful during insertion and removal of the connectors.
NOTE
The connector can vary depending on whether an old or
new board is installed, see below.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage the Z-Drive, the status LED and
the cabling of the robot.
1. 2.
Figure 55 Old mainboards: black connectors with push

design
NOTE
Connectors with push design: Push the two clips with one
hand and pull with the other gently. If you feel a high resis-
tance push the cable back in position and try it again!

3 Check the belt tension, see “Checking the Belt 4 Replace the sample handler and put it back in the main
Tension” on page 331. chassis.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage the Z-Drive, the status LED and
the cabling of the robot.

5 Connect the four motor cables carefully to the specific Next Steps:
mainboard.
6 Install the electronic box cover, top foam, and top cover,
NOTE see “Install the Top Plates and Main Cover” on
Be careful during insertion and removal of the connectors. page 325.
7 Do an auto referencing after switching on the instru-
NOTE ment, see “Auto Referencing” on page 229.
The connector can vary depending on whether an old or
new board is installed, see below. NOTE
Should the initialization of the Multisampler fail, use the
"Clear Data" button in Lab Advisor before running an auto
referencing again.
1. 2. "Click"

design

Checking the Belt Tension
When To adjust the belt tension
Preparations Remove the sample handler from the module.
Moving Parts
WAR N IN G
Injury
 Switch off the Autosampler. Pull off power cable before checking the
belt tension.
1 Use the clear data function in Lab Advisor to ensure that 2 For checking the belt tension: Leave the robot assembly
auto referencing is required by the system after the belt on a safe place on your desk. Check the free movement
tension procedure. in x and y direction. Check the shape of each connector.
y-direction
x-direction
NOTE
Do not lubricate the x / y rods.

3 Slightly loosen the adjusting nut which releases the 4 Move the Z-drive and check the tension of the belt.
spring loaded mechanism for the belt tension.
Z-drive
The slider will move and automatically slide into the cor-
Adjusting screw rect position.
NOTE
Do not move the slider manually into position.
NOTE
Do not remove the screw completely.
NOTE
A washer and a snap ring are installed under the adjusting
nut.
Next Steps:
5 Retighten the adjusting screw.
NOTE
Overtightening the adjusting screw will damage the metal slider of the sample handler.
6 Do an auto referencing.

Replace the Sample Hotel

G4267-60002 Sample Hotel Assembly
Preparations • Remove the drawers and dummy drawers from the sample hotel.
• Remove the sample handler.
1 Lift up the actuator to release the hotel cable (use 2 Remove front covers to have access to the four front
thumb or index finger); pull the cable out. screws.
1. 2.
3 Loose the four front screws. 4 Loosen the two screws at the drain management kit
(Ref vial bar and leak pane).

5 Lift the leak sensor out of the leak pan using a flat 6 Remove the drain management kit.
screwdriver.
NOTE
Be careful during removement of the leak pan and the
release of the flushport connection.
7 Remove the foam on top of the hotel assembly. 8 Take out the complete hotel assembly carefully.
9 Slide in the new hotel assembly. 10 Replace the foam on top of the hotel assembly.
NOTE
Do not install the sample hotel mainboard cable through the
slit of the foam.

11 Install the drain management kit and fasten the two 12 Reinstall the leak sensor.
screws (Ref vial bar and leak pane).
NOTE
Be careful during installation of the leak pane and the flush-
port connection.
13 Fasten the four front screws at the hotel assembly. 14 Install the front covers of the hotel assembly.
15 Insert the cable in the connector (the actuator is in the 16 Replace the drawers and the dummy drawers as
upper position) parallel to mounting surface. Rotate required.
down the actuator until firmly closed.
1. 2. "Click"

Replace the Hydraulic Box
Standard Dual Needle Multiwash

Figure 57 Variants of the hydraulic box
This procedure describes removing and installing the Standard Hydraulic Box.
The same steps apply for the removal or installation of the other variants of the
Hydraulic Box (Dual needle and Multiwash).
When • When exchanging/replacing the hydraulic box

• When replacing parts inside the hydraulic box

Upgrade Kit for the multisampler, see “Upgrade Kits” on page 458
For upgrading the Multisampler with a Dual-Needle option or a Multi-Wash

NOTE option, please refer to the respective Installation Notes (Agilent Infinity II Series
Multi-wash Upgrade Kit Installation Note (G7167-90210) and Dual-Needle Infinity
II Upgrade Kit Installation Note (G7167-90220)).
For changing the metering devices in the hydraulic boxes of the multisampler,
NOTE the sampler must be in the service position.

1 Remove the tubing holder insert. 2 Remove the transport protection screw.
3 Remove the capillaries, the tubings, and the leak sensor 4 Lift the clip (bottom of the hydraulic box) before you pull
which are connected to the hydraulic box. out the whole hydraulic unit.
5 Place the hydraulic box on the bench close to the main 6 Continue with replacing inner parts of the hydraulic box
frame. Check the hydraulic adapter board. before reinstallation.

7 Install the hydraulic box. 8 Install the capillaries, tubings, and the leak sensor to the
hydraulic box.
NOTE
Be careful that the hydraulic box is installed correctly and
fits exactly in the main chassis (Check if the lever is cor-
rectly in place).
9 Install the transport protection screw. 10 Install the tubing holder insert.

Disassemble and Reassemble Inner Parts of the Hydraulic Box
Disassemble and Reassemble Inner Parts of the

Hydraulic Box
When When replacing/exchanging parts inside the hydraulic box:

• Injection valve head
• Metering device (analytical head)
• Flush head
• Hydraulic Board
• Direct Actuators
• Piezo Pump/Solvent Selection Valve
• Peristaltic pump motor
• Leak sensor

5061-3356 Leak Sensor Assembly
5067-4162 Direct-Actuator-50 Assembly
5067-4204 Valve Block Pump Assembly
For further parts please check hydraulic box part list.
Preparations Hydraulic box removed from the module
1 Place the hydraulic box on the bench. 2 Remove the foam by releasing the hook to have access
to the Leak Sensor cabling.

3 Remove the Leak Sensor cabling. 4 Replace the Injection Valve head, see “Replace the Injec-
tion Valve” on page 270
5 Replace the Analytical Head/Metering Device, see
“Remove the Metering Seal” on page 275.
NOTE
Power cycle the module after changing the metering device
to a different type (40 µL, 100 µL, or 900 µL analytical head).
6 Replace the Flush Head (Only if this part is in your con-

figuration), see “Replace the Flushhead Seal” on
page 289
7 Unscrew the front screws of the actuators. 8 Replace the actuators and the leak sensor.
NOTE
Be careful with the cabling.
Remember the correct position and the correct orientation

of cabling and the connectors of the hydraulic board.

9 Replace the piezo pump/SSV (Only if this part is setup 10 Replace the Peristaltic Pump, see “Replace the Peristal-
in your configuration). tic Pump Cartridge” on page 286.
NOTE
Notice the correct plumbing.
The piezo pump must be flushed correctly with the SSV

block. Be careful with the o-ring.
11 Install the Leak Sensor cabling. 12 Install the foam.

Disassemble and Reassemble the Electronical Box
Disassemble and Reassemble the Electronical

Box
When When replacing/if defective:

• main board or fusion board
• fan
• power supply

G7167-65850 Autosampler Specific Board
G4200-65880 Fusion Board
G4267-81006 Fan Axial E-Box
0950-5406 Power Supply 350 W
0380-3056 Plastic Spacer
Preparations • Top cover and top plate removed, see “Remove the Main Cover and Top Plates” on page 323.
• Remove the sample thermostat or sample cooler (if installed).
The connector type can vary, depending on whether a new main board is
NOTE installed or an old one.
The old main board uses black connectors with a push design. The new main
board uses white connectors without push design.

1 Disconnect the Sample Handler Cables, Sample Hotel 2 Loosen slightly the two holding screws.
cable, the Power switch cable, the Status LED cable and
the Hydraulic Box cable. Leave the Sample Cooler
cables in place.
NOTE
Be careful during insertion and removal of the connectors.
NOTE
The connector of the Sample Handler can vary depending
on whether an old or new board is installed, see below.

design
NOTE
To pull out the hotel cable, you need to first release the
cable by lifting the actuator using your thumb or index finger
(see “Replace the Sample Hotel” on page 333).

3 Remove the complete electronic box from the main- 4 Unscrew the mainboard holding screws.
frame.
5 Remove the fan and power supply cables from the 6 Push the clamps backwards and lift the mainboards out
mainboard connectors. of the electronic box.
HINT
The mainboard lies on top of the electronic box fillister

7 Remove mainboard/fusion board assembly as one part. 8 Separate the piggybacked fusion board from the spe-
cific mainboard. If there are spacers in between, cut the
spacers before separating the boards.
NOTE
If you separate the fusion board from the specific board cut
the spacers which hold the boards together. (Plastic Spacer
(0380-3056))
NOTE
Replacing the fusion board must always be done in a
straight upwards or downwards movement. This will avoid
bent pins on the mainboards.
9 Remove the fan. 10 Unscrew the screws that fix the power supply to the
electronical box. Remove the power supply.
2.
1.
1.

11 Re-assemble the electronic parts of the electronic box 12 Install the power supply and fix it with the screws to the
carefully. electronical box.
NOTE 1.
Reinstall the mainboard/fusion board assembly as one part.
2.
2.
13 Reinstall the mainboard/fusion board assembly. 14 Install the fan and power supply cables to the main-
board connectors.
15 Fix the mainboard holding screws. 16 Install the electronic box to the mainframe.

17 Fasten the two holding screws at the back of the mod- 18 Reconnect the Sample Handler Cables, Sample Hotel
ule. cable, the Power switch cable, the Status LED cable and
the Hydraulic Box cable.
NOTE
The connector of the Sample Handler can vary depending
on whether an old or new board is installed, see below.

design
NOTE
To connect the sample hotel cable, the actuator must be in
the upper position and the cable must be inserted parallel to
the mounting surface. Afterwards, rotate the actuator down
until firmly closed (see “Replace the Sample Hotel” on
page 333).
If you have replaced the specific mainboard or the fusion board by a new one,
NOTE you have to re-type the module number, reinstall the firmware, do an auto
referencing, and a drawer configuration again.

Replace the Fusion Board
Replace the Fusion Board

C AU T I O N (ESD).
If the module has been used in Emulation mode (for example G7114A VWD used
NOTE as G1314F VWD) perform the required conversion via Lab Advisor.
1 Remove the module from the stack.

2 Remove the main covers.
3 Unscrew the FUSION board at the rear of the module.
4 Lift the FUSION board carefully from the main board.
Depending on the module there might be two white plastic spacers that fix the
NOTE board in position.
5 Insert the new FUSION board on the two connectors.
Assure that the two white plastic spacers are in place (if required).
NOTE
6 Fix the screw at there the rear of the module.

7 Plug the power to the instrument and turn the instrument on.
8 If the instrument starts in resident, load the correct firmware (main and
resident from the same firmware set).
9 If still a problem, replace the main board.
OR
If no problem, the main board is not required.

Replace the Needle Port Assembly
When If broken

G4267-60044 Needle Port Assembly Station
Preparations Remove all sample containers from the workspace.

The pump should be switched off or in Standby mode.
1 Select the service mode in the Lab Advisor SW > Ser- 2 Loosen the Leak sensor.
vice&Diagnostic Menu Maintenance (e.g. needle
exchange or loop exchange procedure) or manually
remove the needle assembly from the needle port
assembly, see “Remove the Needle Assembly” on
page 252.

3 Loosen the connection to the washport. 4 Loosen the two screws of the drain management and
remove the drain management (ref. bar and leak pane).

5 Remove the needle seat. 6 Install the new needle station.
NOTE
Do not overtighten the fixing screw for the needle port
assembly. Overtightening this screw can damage the base
plate of the instrument.

Next Steps:
7 Reinstall the drain management kit.

8 Connect the drain management to the washport.
9 Connect the leak sensor to the drain management kit.
NOTE
Make sure that the orientation of the leak sensor is correct.

Add Needle Port Assembly
When For dual needle upgrade

G4267-60044 Needle Port Assembly Station
Preparations Remove all sample containers from the workspace.

The pump should be switched off or in Standby mode.
1 Select the service mode in the Lab Advisor SW > Ser- 2 Loosen the Leak sensor.
vice&Diagnostic Menu Maintenance (e.g. needle
exchange or loop exchange procedure) or manually
remove the needle assembly from the needle port
assembly, see “Remove the Needle Assembly” on
page 252.

3 Loosen the connection to the washport. 4 Loosen the two screws of the drain management and
remove the drain management (ref. bar and leak pane).

5 If you want to update the autosampler to a dual needle 6 Install the new needle station.
setup, loosen the screw of the needle port assembly or
the needle port adapter plate for the second needle port NOTE
assembly.
Do not overtighten the fixing screw for the needle port
assembly. Overtightening this screw can damage the base
plate of the instrument.

Next Steps:
7 Reinstall the drain management kit.

8 Connect the drain management to the washport.
9 Connect the leak sensor to the drain management kit.
NOTE
Make sure that the orientation of the leak sensor is correct.

Replace the Power Switch

5067-6140 Power Switch Assembly, Coated
Flat screwdriver
Preparations • Remove all sample containers from the workspace and the sample hotel
• Switch off the instrument
1 Remove the main cover, see “Remove the Main Cover 2 Move the front of instrument close to the edge of the
and Top Plates” on page 323 bench. This allows easy access to the power switch
from below.

3 Lift up the entire metal chassis to separate the plastic 4 While pressing a flat screwdriver into the slit at the bot-
base cover from the chassis. Shift back the mainframe tom [1], push the levers into the panel [2].
by a few centimeters to access the power switch.
5 Slide out the Power Switch completely [1]. Pull the flat 6 Replace the power switch and reconnect the Power
cable out of the connector to disconnect the Power Switch cable to the Power Switch. Slide it into its final
Switch Cable [2]. position until it clicks.
NOTE
If the power switch cable has to be replaced as well, the old
cable can be used for guidance. Use some adhesive tape to
fix the old cable to the new one and pull the entire extension
through the cable passage to the mainboard.

Disassemble and Reassemble the Door Mechanism
Disassemble and Reassemble the Door

Mechanism
When If you need access to the front board

Tweezer
Philips screwdriver
Preparations • Remove the drawers and dummy drawers from the sample hotel.
• Remove the sample handler.
• Remove the sample hotel assembly.
If the door mechanism is defective then you have to replace the complete front
NOTE assembly (Hotel Front Assembly (G4267-68724)).
1 Remove the sample hotel from the mainframe, see 2 Place the sample hotel assembly on the bench.
“Replace the Sample Hotel” on page 333.

3 Use a tweezer to remove the door lock [1.] first. Release 4 Use a tweezer to release the springs [1.] to lift out the
the springs [2.] to lift the plastic pipe and remove it to door latch (second part of the door mechanism).
the right to pull it out of the sample hotel frame.
NOTE
Keep the orientation of the springs in mind.
1.
2. 2.
1. 1.

5 Unscrew the door button screw. 6 Replace the door button.

OR
Replace the door mechanism.
Next Steps:
7 Fix the door button with the screw.
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw completely. The button needs some space to work properly.
8 Insert the door latch (respect correct orientation of the springs).

9 Insert the door lock.
10 Install the sample hotel to the mainframe, see “Remove and Reinstall the Sample Handler” on page 327.

Replace the Module Firmware
Replace the Module Firmware
When The installation of newer firmware might be necessary

• if a newer version solves problems of older versions or
• to keep all systems on the same (validated) revision.
The installation of older firmware might be necessary
• to keep all systems on the same (validated) revision or
• if a new module with newer firmware is added to a system or
• if third party control software requires a special version.

Agilent Lab Advisor software
Parts required # Description

1 Firmware, tools and documentation from Agilent web site
Preparations Read update documentation provided with the Firmware Update Tool.
To upgrade/downgrade the module’s firmware carry out the following steps:

1 Download the required module firmware, the latest FW Update Tool and the
documentation from the Agilent web.
http://www.agilent.com/en-us/firmwareDownload?whid=69761
2 For loading the firmware into the module follow the instructions in the
documentation.
Module Specific Information
There is no specific information for this module.

Changing the Type and Serial Number
Serial Number and Type Change

When the mainboard or the fusion board has to be replaced, the new board does
not have a serial number. For modules with multiple usage boards, e.g. for some
autosamplers and pumps, the module type has to be set as well. Use the
information from the serial number plate of your module.
Keep in mind that
• the changes become active after a power cycle of the module.
• the information from the serial number plate of the module is used.
• the exact type (product number) is used.
Unusable module or mainboard

C AU T I O N
If the type (product number) and/or serial number are entered incorrectly, the
module may become unusable or is not recognized in a system.
The mainboard may become irreversibly unusable.
 Enter the correct type (product number) and/or serial number.
 All letters must be CAPITAL.
For further information proceed to “Overview” on page 365.
With firmware A.06.02/B.01.02 and above, the entry is checked against the board
NOTE revision, which inhibits setting wrong types for a board. The caution above for
multiple usage boards still applies.

Using the Agilent Lab Advisor

Prerequisites The Agilent Lab Advisor Software must be configured in FSE Mode to have
access to the function Board Check and Change.
Close other user interfaces.
1 Start the Lab Advisor Software.

2 Select Service & Diagnostics on the left navigation panel.
3 Select Board Check and Change in the list on the right panel and click Run in
the right bottom corner.
4 Change the field Type and/or Serial as required (use capital letters only).
Some Agilent modules require the correct mainboard version to match the type.
NOTE
5 Press the button Apply to complete the action.

A message opens: "The module type was changed to XXXXXX. Perform the
following steps now... Close this application. Switch off and on the changed
LC module. Update firmware if required."
6 Close the Lab Advisor Software.
7 Power cycle the module.
8 Restart the User Interface.

Recover Instructions
Overview
The following situations may come up where the instrument is no longer usable
due to
• an incorrect type (product number) entry after the replacement of a
mainboard of the module.
• load of wrong firmware based on the wrong type.
With firmware A.06.02/B.01.02 and above, the entry is checked against the board
NOTE revision.
The wrong type (product number) could be

• incorrect, but a valid module number
• incorrect and invalid module number (any name)
Based on above, the User Interfaces respond differently.
Table 38 Recover From Wrong Type
User Interface incorrect but valid type incorrect but valid type incorrect and invalid type
Example Conditions correct type = G1315B correct type = G1315B correct type = G1315B
entered type = G1314B entered type = G1314B entered type = G1319B
plus wrong firmware from
G1314B
Agilent Diagnostic shows the incorrect product shows the incorrect product shows the incorrect product
Software (preferred number number number
tool) access to the module is possi- access to the module is possi- access to the module is possi-
ble as described in “Recover ble as described in “Recover ble as described in “Recover
with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type
Only)” on page 367 Only)” on page 367 Only)” on page 367
If wrong firmware has been
loaded in addition, only the Agi-
lent Lab Advisor Software can
revert to correct product num-
ber as described in “Recover
with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type &
Firmware)” on page 366

Recover with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type & Firmware)
Prerequisites Agilent Lab Advisor Software in FSE mode.

If no LAN connection is possible use RS-232 or USB.
The example uses G1315B as correct type.
The module must be configured to "Stay in Resident Mode" (module boots in
resident mode - flashing status LED).
1 To set up the module in Lab Advisor, connect the module (or the system) in
Lab Advisor.
2 Select Instrument Control on the left panel.
3 Open the Controls menu of the respective module.
4 Expand the Conversions sections of the menu.
5 Click Transfer to Resident FW.
6 Open a connection to the module (or via system).
8 Select the module of interest in the middle panel.
9 Select Board Check and Change and press Run in the right bottom corner.
10 In the type field enter G1315B and press Apply.
11 Close the Lab Advisor Software.
12 Switch off and on the changed LC module.
13 Open Lab Advisor and connect to the module (or the system)
14 Set module's configuration back to Main Mode using Lab Advisor (Instrument
Control > Controls > Conversions).
15 Update firmware if required.

Recover with Agilent Lab Advisor (Type Only)
Prerequisites The Lab Advisor Software is used in FSE mode.

If no LAN connection is possible use RS-232.
The example uses G1315B as correct type.
1 Open a connection to the module (or system).

The module will be listed with the wrong product number (type).
3 Select the module of interest in the middle panel.
4 Select Board Check and Change in the right window and press Run in the right
bottom corner.
5 In the type field enter G1315B and press Apply.
6 Close the Lab Advisor software.
7 Power cycle the module, restart Lab Advisor and reconnect to the LC stack.
Verify that type and serial number have been updated correctly.

Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat Repair

Danger due to improper work on the refrigeration unit
WAR N IN G
Risk of injury
 Repair work on the refrigeration unit must only be carried out by suitably
qualified personnel.
 Operation and maintenance work on the refrigeration unit including
disassembly must only be carried out by refrigeration companies.
 In case of faults on the electrical system or on the refrigeration unit,
inform the customer service.
Pressurized fluids and rotating parts

WAR N IN G
Risk of personal injury
 Only operate the Sample Cooler or the Sample Thermostat with the
device panel installed.
 In case of damage or fault of the refrigeration unit, contact the
manufacturer and return the refrigeration unit if necessary.
Damaged refrigerant lines and sharp-edged cooling fins

WAR N IN G
Risk of burns or frostbites, or cuts from sharp-edged cooling fins.
 Do not touch or damage the refrigerant lines or cooling fins.

WAR N IN G
and laboratory.

WAR N IN G
Wrong operating or storage position of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat

C AU T I O N
Insufficient system lubrication leads to damage to Sample Cooler/Sample
Thermostat.
 Do not store or operate the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat on its side or
in an upside-down position.
 Always leave the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat in the normal (upright)
operating position.

C AU T I O N (ESD).

All instructions provided here are based on Agilent’s Sample Thermostat

NOTE (G7167-60101). The same repair procedure is applicable for Agilent’s Sample
Cooler (G7167-60005), unless stated otherwise. The board layout and the parts
numbering may differ for the Sample Cooler.
The following procedures only describe the exchange of the electronic

NOTE components and not the repair of the refrigerant circuit. Do not dismantle the
refrigerant circuit.
Laying the refrigerator assembly on its back is allowed for a short period, if that is
NOTE explicitly requested by a repair step.

Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover

Preparations Remove the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
Thermostat” on page 309.
1 Locate the five fixation screws in the condenser sheet 2 Remove the five screws from the condenser sheet
metal cover. metal cover.
3 Break the safety seal using a flat head screwdriver or a 4 Remove the condenser sheet metal cover in a straight
cutter. upward movement.

Remove the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover

Preparations Remove the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
1 Locate the five screws of the evaporator sheet metal 2 Remove the five screws from the evaporator sheet
cover. metal cover.
3 Lift the metal cover from the base plate.

Overview of Main Assemblies
Figure 60 Sample Thermostat and Sample Cooler: overview of main assemblies (front view).
1 Mainboard
2 Dryer
3 Capillary Tube Coil
4 Evaporator Fan (behind the EPS foam)
5 Evaporator
6 Evaporator Temperature Sensor (digital)
7 Thermal Fuse
8 Heating Elements

2
3
4
5
Figure 61 Sample Thermostat and Sample Cooler: overview of main assemblies (rear view).
1 Compressor Board with Heat Sink
2 Condenser
3 Condenser Fan
4 Condenser Temperature Sensor (digital)
5 Overpressure Switch
6 Compressor
7 Condensate/Leak Sensor (in the condensate panel)

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 62 Sample Thermostat: overview of the main board.
1 Power (from sampler)
2 Data Transfer (from sampler)
3 Heating Elements
4 Thermal Fuse
6 Condenser Fan
7 Evaporator Fan
8 Power (to compressor)
9 Condensate/Leak Sensor
10 Data Transfer (to compressor)

7
8
9
10
Figure 63 Sample Cooler: overview of the main board.
1 Data Transfer (from sampler)
2 Power (from sampler)
3 Condenser Fan
4 Evaporator Fan
5 Condensate/Leak Sensor
6 Power (to compressor)
7 Data Transfer (to compressor)

Replace the Connector Compressor Assembly
When • Sample Cooler Function Test fails (error message "Target temperature has not been reached in
time"), while
• Compressor current stays at zero, showing periodical spikes

5190-1442 Precision tubing cutter

G7167-60003 Compressor Cable Assembly
Preparations • Remove the Sample Thermostat, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat” on
page 309
• Remove the condenser sheet metal cover, see “Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on
page 371
This section applies to the Sample Thermostat only. Do not perform this
NOTE procedure for the Sample Cooler.

1 Locate the compressor cable assembly at the back of 2 Remove the screw nut on the top of the compressor
the Sample Thermostat. body using a 5/16 inch wrench.
3 Remove the plastic cover from the top of the compres- 4 Carefully remove the three-pin connector of the cable
sor body. assembly from the compressor body.
5 Remove the cable from between the condensor fan and 6 Cut the red and black wires of the connector compres-
base plate, and then from between the condenser fan sor cable with a wire cutter above the main board.
and heat exchanger.
NOTE
NOTE Do not damage any other cables or the main board.
Do not apply extensive force to the condensor fan assem-
bly.

7 Locate the four-pin connector with the red-black cabling 8 Cut the red and black wires of the connector compres-
and carefully remove it from its socket on the main sor cable with a wire cutter at the connector.
board.
9 Remove the remnants of the red-black cabling from the 10 Remove the four screws that fix the heat sink to the
enclosed space behind the main board by gently pulling main board.
the top part of the cables, while pushing the bottom
end.
11 Locate the five-pin connector of the compressor cable 12 Grab a firm hold of the heat sink and remove the con-
assembly on the main board. nector from its socket.

13 Connect the five-pin connector of the new compressor 14 Fix the heat sink to the main board with the four screws
cable assembly to the main board. and washers.
15 Connect the three-pin connector of the new compressor 16 Ensure that the rubber spacer is in the correct position.
cable assembly to the compressor body.
17 Reinstall the plastic cover to the top of the compressor 18 Route the cable around the condensor fan and the com-
body and fasten it with the screw nut. pressor body, and ensure correct positioning.
NOTE
Ensure that no extensive pulling force is applied to the con-
nector on top of the compressor.

19 Carefully route the red-black cable with the four-pin con- 20 Slightly pull the middle part of the cable aside and guide
nector underneath the other wires. it around the other cables in a loop.
NOTE
Make sure that the loop does not reach over the edge of the
foam so it does not get damaged during reinstallation of the
sheet metal cover.
21 Connect the four-pin connector to the corresponding Reinstall the condensor sheet metal cover, see “Install the
socket on the main board. Route the red-black cable Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 397.
between the main board and the condenser fan.
C AU T I O N
NOTE Damage to the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
Pay special attention to the upper left corner of the main  Wait at least 30 min before switching on the compres-
board. sor of the cooler/thermostat.

reach equilibrium.
22 Reinstall the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat into
the autosampler, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sam-
ple Thermostat” on page 309.
23 Run a Sample Cooler Function Test to verify correct func-
tioning of the system, see “Sample Cooler Function
Test” on page 237.

Remove the Refrigerating Assembly
When • The digital temperature sensor must be replaced (see “Replace the Digital Temperature
Sensor” on page 388).
• The evaporator fan must be replaced (see “Replace the Evaporator Fan” on page 393).

1 Grab a firm hold of the two sides of the refrigerator 2 Carefully lift up the whole refrigerator assembly and
assembly. position it onto the side edges of the condensate panel.
3 Locate the leak sensor at the back of the condensate 4 Remove the fixation screw of the sensor with a T10
panel. Torx screwdriver.

5 Grab a firm hold of the two sides of the refrigerator 6 Carefully lift up the whole refrigerator assembly from
assembly. the condensate panel and place it onto its backside.
NOTE
Laying the refrigerator assembly on its back might be
allowed for a short period, if that is explicitly requested by a
repair step.

Replace the Condensate/Leak Sensor
When • Condensate issues despite working drainage.

• Error message Sample temperature control switched off due to condensate (error ID 30715)
appears with parameter "2". See “Sample temperature control switched off due to
condensate” on page 212.
• Error message Cooler condensate sensor defect (error ID 30719) appears. See “Cooler conden-
sate sensor defect” on page 216.


5061-3356 Leak Sensor Assembly
(for condensate detection)
Preparations
• Remove the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
Thermostat” on page 309)
• Remove the sheet metal covers, see “Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 371
and “Remove the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover” on page 372
Before replacing the condensate/leak sensor, always verify that the issue is not
NOTE caused by incorrect routing of the condensate tubes, or by overfilling of solvent
waste containers.
1 Locate the main board of the thermostat. 2 Disconnect the leak sensor cable connector from the
main board.

3 Grab a firm hold of the two sides of the refrigerator 4 Carefully lift up the whole refrigerator assembly and
assembly. position it onto the side edges of the condensate panel.
5 Locate the leak sensor. 6 Loosen the torx screw of the leak sensor.
7 Detach the leak sensor cable from the black glue with 8 Remove the leak sensor connector from under the heat
which it is fixed to the foam. sink of the compressor board and remove the leak sen-
sor assembly.

9 Guide the connector of the new leak sensor under the 10 Connect the leak sensor connector to the main board.
heat sink of the compressor board to the front.
11 Fix the sensor cable in the adhesive at the foam. Use a 12 Install the new leak sensor to the condensate panel and
screwdriver for support. fix it with the screw.
13 Position the leak sensor correctly. 14 Place the refrigeration assembly back into the conden-
sate panel.

Reinstall the two sheet metal covers, see “Install the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 397 and “Install the Evapora-
tor Sheet Metal Cover” on page 398.
C AU T I O N
 Wait at least 30 min before switching on the compressor of the cooler/thermostat.
 This allows the refrigerant and system lubrication to reach equilibrium.

15 Reinstall the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat into the autosampler, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
16 Run the Sample Cooler Function Test to verify correct functioning of the system, see “Sample Cooler Function Test” on
page 237.

Replace the Digital Temperature Sensor
When • Sample Cooler Function Test failed (message: The cooler's built-in temperature sensor does not
work correctly.)
• Error message Thermostat sensor defect appears (error ID 30751). See “Thermostat sensor
defect” on page 221.
• Lab Advisor readout for Evaporator Temperature is -67.7 °C

5023-3089 Torx key set
OR 5190-1442 Precision tubing cutter

G7167-81102 Digital Temperature Sensor, Evaporator
4910004200 Zip ties
Preparations Remove both sheet metal covers, see “Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 371 and
“Remove the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover” on page 372.
For Sample Coolers with analog temperature sensor (<DEBAT02001), the repair
NOTE instructions provided here are not applicable.
1 Locate the main board of the thermostat. 2 Remove the temperature sensor connector (J15).

3 Remove all zip ties fixing the temperature sensor cable. 4 Remove the piece of EPS foam that fixes the cables.
Use a suitable cable cutter.
5 Locate the digital temperature sensor cables. 6 Carefully remove the sensor cable.
NOTE
Do not apply to much force when you are pulling the cables.
7 Remove the refrigerating assembly, see “Remove the 8 Locate the digital temperature sensor in the copper
Refrigerating Assembly” on page 382. pipe.

9 Gently move the interfering wires out of the way. 10 Remove the sensor from the copper pipe by gentle pull-
ing the cabling.
NOTE
Do not contaminate any part of the thermostat with the
thermal paste.
11 Slide the new digital temperature sensor into the copper 12 Fix the sensor with a new zip tie.
pipe. Move any interfering cables aside.
NOTE
It is not necessary to apply new thermal paste. The amount
of thermal paste remaining in the copper pipe is sufficient.

13 Reinstall the refrigerator assembly, see “Install the 14 Route the thermostat sensor cable through the foam
Refrigerating Assembly” on page 396. and place it back into its original position.
15 Reinstall the fixation foam. Ensure correct positioning 16 Position the foam correctly.
of the foam.
17 Leave an excess length of the thermostat sensor cable 18 Fix the cables to the copper pipe with new zip ties. Use
(approx. 3 cm) in the condensate panel and fold it into a a screwdriver for easier positioning of the zip tie.
U-turn shape.
NOTE
The U-turn shape prevents the condensate accumulating on
the surface of the cables from reaching the sensor body.

19 Gently press down the foam to position the pointy end 20 Ensure correct positioning of the cables and the zip ties.
of the zip tie.
21 Connect the temperature sensor connector to the J15 Reinstall the two sheet metal covers, see “Install the Con-
socket on the main board. denser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 397 and “Install the
Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover” on page 398.
C AU T I O N


reach equilibrium.
22 Reinstall the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat into
the autosampler, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sam-
ple Thermostat” on page 309.
23 Run the Sample Cooler Function Test to verify correct
functioning of the system, see “Sample Cooler Function
Test” on page 237.

Replace the Evaporator Fan
When • Error message Thermostat fan defect (error ID 30771) appears. See “Thermostat fan defect” on
page 223.
• Error message Fan failed (error ID 0068) appears with parameter "2".
• Readout for evaporator fan speed in Lab Advisor is zero


G4267-81008 Evaporator fan
Preparations • Remove both sheet metal covers, see “Remove the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 371
and “Remove the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover” on page 372.
• Remove the refrigerating assembly, see “Remove the Refrigerating Assembly” on page 382.
1 Remove the evaporator fan connector from the P4 2 Locate the evaporator fan below the bottom foam
socket on the thermostat mainboard while pressing the cover.
plastic clips on the connector body.

3 Remove the bottom foam cover. 4 Detach the cable from the adhesive with which it is fixed
to the foam, and remove the fan.
5 Install the new evaporator fan to the correct position in 6 Fix the cable in the foam.
the foam.
7 Connect the evaporator fan connector to its socket (P4) 8 Reinstall the bottom foam cover.
on the main board.
NOTE
Ensure that both vibration dampeners are in place. Ensure
correct positioning of the foam.

Next Steps:
9 Reinstall the refrigerator assembly, see “Install the Refrigerating Assembly” on page 396.
10 Reinstall the two sheet metal covers, see “Install the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover” on page 397 and “Install the Evap-
orator Sheet Metal Cover” on page 398.
C AU T I O N
 Wait at least 30 min before switching on the compressor of the cooler/thermostat.
 This allows the refrigerant and system lubrication to reach equilibrium.

11 Reinstall the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat into the autosampler, see “Replace the Sample Cooler/Sample
12 Run the Sample Cooler Function Test to verify correct functioning of the system, see “Sample Cooler Function Test” on
page 237.

Install the Refrigerating Assembly
When • The digital temperature sensor must be replaced (see “Replace the Digital Temperature
Sensor” on page 388).
• The evaporator fan must be replaced (see “Replace the Evaporator Fan” on page 393).
1 Carefully place the refrigerator assembly back onto the 2 Reinstall the leak sensor.
side edges of the condensate panel in an upright posi-
tion.
3 Position the leak sensor correctly. 4 Place the refrigeration assembly back into the conden-
sate panel.

Install the Condenser Sheet Metal Cover

1 Install the condenser sheet metal cover. 2 Fix the sheet metal cover with the five screws.
NOTE
Ensure correct positioning of the insulation foams.
3 Affix a country-specific PM sticker to the back of the Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat in order to recognize later
whether the unit has already been repaired.

Install the Evaporator Sheet Metal Cover

1 Install the evaporator sheet metal cover and fix it with 2 Ensure correct positioning of the insulation foam.
the five screws.

11 Parts for Maintenance and Upgrade or
Options
Standard Parts 401

Hotel Assembly 404
Hotel Drawer 406
Sample Handler Assembly 407
Bio-Compatible Analytical Head Assembly 40 µL 409
Bio-inert Analytical Head Assembly (100 µL) (600 bar) 412
Flush Head Assembly 500 µL 415
Bio Flush Head Assembly 500 µl 417
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI 419
Bio-Compatible 2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI 421
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve IDEX 422
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve Bio-inert IDEX 423
Injection Valve with Actuator 425
Sample Loops and Capillaries (Dual Needle) 426
3-Position/6-Port Peripheral Valve Dual Needle 428
2-Position/8-Port Injection Valve Dual Needle 429
Sheet Metal Kit 430
Cabinet Kit 431
Needle Port Assembly 432
Door Assy 433
Electronic Box 434
Power Switch Assy 436
Hydraulic Box (Standard) 437
Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Standard) 439

Bio Hydraulic Box (1300 bar) 441

Hydraulic Box (Multiwash) 443
Bio and Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Multiwash) 445
Hydraulic Box (Dual Needle) 447
Valve Box Multiwash 449
Accessory Kit 450
Bottles 452
Tubing Kit Sampler Standard 453
Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Multi-Wash 455
Multi Draw Kits 456
Bio-Inert Multi-Draw Kit 457
Upgrade Kits 458
Leak System Parts 459
Sample Thermostat 460
Service Parts for Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat 461
This chapter provides information on parts material required for the module.

Standard Parts
Standard Parts
Standard Parts
p/n Description
G4267-87201 Needle Assembly
G4267-87210 Needle Assembly (slotted) for high injection volumes
G4267-87012 High Pressure Needle Seat, 0.12 mm (PEEK)
5068-0198 Rotor Seal 1300 bar (PEEK)

for 1290 Infinity II Injection Valve (Single Needle)
5068-0209 Rotor Seal (PEEK)

for 1260 Infinity II Injection Valve (Single Needle)

for Dual needle Injection Valve

for Dual needle Peripheral Valve
G7167-60300 Extension Sample Loop-Flex 500 – 900 µL Right Single Needle
For using the 500 µL or 900 µL Sample loop cartridge in a single needle system,
NOTE install a 900 µL analytical head.

Standard Parts
Standard Parts used in the 1260 Infinity II Bio-inert

System
p/n Description
G5668-87200 Needle Bio-Sampler
(G5668A)

(G5668A)
G5668-87017 Bio Seat ID 0.17

(G5668A)

Standard Parts
Standard Parts used in the 1290 Infinity II Bio LC

System
p/n Description
G7137-87201 Needle Bio-compatible
G7137-87012 High pressure seat assembly 0.12 mm Bio-compatible

Hotel Assembly
Hotel Assembly
Item p/n Description

G4267-60002 Sample Hotel Assembly
1 G4267-40001 Cover Top
G4267-40002 Cover Frame Top
2 G4267-40006 Cover Bottom
G4267-40018 Cover Frame Bottom
3 G4267-40022 Hotel Back
4 G4267-65820 Multisampler Hotel Front Board
5 G4267-65821 Multisampler Hotel Rear Board
6 G4267-68020 Cable-Kit Hotel
7 5188-8046 Cable Mainboard Hotel
8 G4267-68724 Hotel Front Assembly
G4267-81201 Cable ESD Hotel

(not shown)

Hotel Assembly
5
1
2
4
Figure 64 Hotel assembly

Hotel Drawer
Hotel Drawer

1 G7167-60021 Drawer 1H
(including 2*G4267-60206 Sample Tray (Palette))1
2 G7167-60020 Drawer 2H
3 G7167-60022 Drawer 3H
G4267-60024 Dummy Drawer

(not shown)
1 Note: This partnumber should only be used for repairs. For increasing the capacity in the Sample Hotel
please order a pair of drawers via ELSA http://wadnts02.germany.agilent.com/csc/tools/web_elsa/el-
sa.htm.
Figure 65 Hotel drawer

Sample Handler Assembly
Sample Handler Assembly
p/n Description
G4267-60001 Sample Handler Assembly
5067-5890 Status LED Assembly includes Status LED Holder and cable. (The
cable has adhesive stripes at the back)
(not shown)

(not shown)
Figure 66 Sample handler assembly

Analytical Head Assembly 40 µL

G4267-60042 Analytical Head, 40 µL
1 G4267-60423 Head Assembly, 40 µL
3 G4267-60422 Seal Support Assembly, 40 µL
4 0515-1052 Screw
5 G4267-60432 Spring Adapter Assembly
7 G4267-40430 RFID Clamp

(not including the RFID Tag)
5043-1000 O-Ring
(not shown)
5500-1159 Capillary ST 0.17 mmx100 mm SX/S-2.3

Capillary from the metering device to the injection valve (not shown)
3
2
1 7
Figure 67 Analytical head assembly, 40 µL

Bio-Compatible Analytical Head Assembly 40 µL

G7137-60042 Bio-compatible head 40 µL
for G7137A
1 G7137-60000 Bio-compatible head assembly, 40 µL
4 0515-1052 Screw, ST, M3x0.5, Hex 2.5 mm

5043-1000 O-Ring
(not shown)
5500-1278 Capillary MP35N 0.17 mm x 100 mm SL/SL


3
2
1 7


G4267-60043 Analytical Head, 100 µL
for G7167A, G7167B
4 0515-1052 Screw, ST, M3x0.5, Hex 2.5 mm

5043-1000 O-Ring
(not shown)

3
2
1 7

Bio-inert Analytical Head Assembly (100 µL) (600 bar)

G5668-60043 Bio-Inert Analytical Head 100 µL
for G5668A
1 G5668-60433 BIO Analytical Head 100 µL
4 0515-1052 Screw, ST, M3x0.5, Hex 2.5 mm


3
2
1 7


G4267-60046 Analytical head, 900 µL, 400 bar
4 SCREW-SKT SCREW-SKT HD CAP M2.5 X 0.45 10MM LG (not available)

5043-1000 O-Ring
(not shown)

3
2
1 7

Flush Head Assembly 500 µL

G4267-60049 Flush head, 500 µL
1 G4267-60491 Flush Head Assembly, 500 µL
2 5023-2473 Sealing Plate 500 µL
3 G4267-60482 Cylinder Assembly, 500 µL
4 5067-5918 Flush Head Seal 500 µL
5 0515-5167 Screw
6 1410-1881 Bearing-Sleeve 8 mm-ID 10 mm-OD 10 mm-LG Pl
8 5067-5919 Piston Assembly 500 µL
9 G4267-60451 Pump Valve IN
10 G4267-60452 Pump Valve Out
5043-1000 O-Ring
(not shown)
5500-1167 Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 250 mm SL-SL

Capillary from the flush head to the injection valve (not shown)

10 6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 71 Flush head assembly, 500 µL

Bio Flush Head Assembly 500 µl

G5668-60049 Flush Head Bio 500 µL
1 G5668-60491 Flush Head Bio Assembly, 500 µL
2 5023-2473 Sealing Plate 500 µL
3 G4267-60482 Cylinder Assembly, 500 µL
4 G5668-60494 Seal 500 µL Bio
5 0515-5167 Screw
6 1410-1881 Bearing-Sleeve 8 mm-ID 10 mm-OD 10 mm-LG Pl
8 5067-5919 Piston Assembly 500 µL
9 G5668-60492 Pump Valve IN
10 G5668-60493 Pump Valve Out

10 6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 72 Flush head assembly, 500 µL

2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI

5067-4232 2-position/6-port Injection Valve (VICI) 1300 bar
1300 bar (G7167B)
1 5068-0210 Stator screws
2 5068-0197 Stator head
5500-1159 Capillary ST 0.17x100 SX/S-2.3

Metering Device to Injection Valve
5500-1246 Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI
5500-1157 Capillary ST, 0.12 mm x 500 mm SL/S

Sampler to column compartment
5067-6127 Blank Nut SL
For the VICI Valve SL, SX, or SI fittings are mandatory.

NOTE

Figure 73 Injection valve assembly (VICI)

Bio-Compatible 2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve VICI
Bio-Compatible 2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve

VICI
p/n Description
5067-6739 2-position/6-port injection valve Bio 1300 bar
for G7137A
5428-0006 Stator screws

Metering device to injection valve
5500-1279 Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 500 mm SI/SI

Sampler to column compartment
5500-1419 Capillary MP35N 0.17 mm x 500 mm, SI/SI

Pump to sampler

2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve IDEX
2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve IDEX

5067-6698 2-position/6-port RC Injection Valve
2 5068-0208 Stator head
3 5068-0120 Stator ring
5 1535-4045 Bearing ring
5
4
Figure 74 Injection valve assembly (IDEX)

2-Position/6-Port Injection Valve Bio-inert IDEX

5067-4263 2-position/6-port Injection Valve Bio-inert 600 bar
(G5668A)
2 5068-0060 Bio-inert stator head
3 5068-0120 Stator ring
5 1535-4045 Bearing ring

5
4
Figure 75 Injection valve assembly (IDEX)

Injection Valve with Actuator
Injection Valve with Actuator

(G7167B)
OR 5067-6698 2-position/6-port RC Injection Valve
2 5043-0291 Lock Nut
3 5188-8030 Tag Reader
4 5067-4162 Direct-Actuator-50 Assembly
Figure 76 Injection valve with actuator

Sample Loops and Capillaries (Dual Needle)
Figure 77 Capillary connections (Dual Needle Option)
Important for precision and avoiding of retention time shifts: only these sample
NOTE loops must be used for the dual needle option.
It is mandatory that the configuration of the dual needle system, especially

NOTE sample loops, must match to the installed hardware to avoid damage to the
system.

Dual needle Sample Loops right
p/n Description
G4267-60311 Sample Loop 20 µL right Dual needle
G7167-60311 Extension Sample Loop-Flex 500 – 900 µL Right Dual Needle
Dual needle Sample Loops left
p/n Description
G4267-60301 Sample loop 20 µL left Dual needle
G7167-68501 Sample Loop 500 µL left Dual needle
G7167-68901 Sample Loop 900 µL left Dual needle
G7167-60301 Extension Sample Loop-Flex 500 – 900 µL Left Dual Needle
Capillaries for the Dual Needle Option
p/n Description
Port 4 Peripheral Valve/Port 8 Injection Valve

Port 2 Injection Valve/ Port 1 Peripheral Valve

Port 3 Peripheral Valve/Metering Device bottom

Metering Device Top/Port 6 Peripheral Valve

Port 4 Injection Valve/Port 5 Peripheral Valve
5500-1238 Capillary ST 0.12 mm x 105 mm SL/SL

3-Position/6-Port Peripheral Valve Dual Needle
3-Position/6-Port Peripheral Valve Dual Needle
Figure 78 Peripheral valve (dual needle)
p/n Description
5067-4256 3-position/6-port Peripheral Valve DN 1300 bar
5068-0197 Stator head

2-Position/8-Port Injection Valve Dual Needle
2-Position/8-Port Injection Valve Dual Needle
Figure 79 Injection valve (dual needle)

5067-4260 2-position/8-port Injection Valve Dual Needle 1300 bar
1 5068-0231 Stator

Sheet Metal Kit
Sheet Metal Kit
p/n Description
G4267-68701 Sheet Metal Kit
G4267-05211 Sheet Metal Back Cover for Infinity II Samplers

(orderable as separate part)
Figure 80 Sheet metal kit

Cabinet Kit
Cabinet Kit
p/n Description
G4267-68713 Cabinet Kit
5043-0286 Base Cover Infinity II
5043-0982 Status Indicator
G4267-40005 Leak Adapter Top
Figure 81 Cabinet kit

Needle Port Assembly
Needle Port Assembly

1 G4267-60044 Needle Port Assembly Station
2 G4267-40045 Needle port Adapter
2 1
Figure 82 Needle port assembly

Door Assy
Door Assy
Item # p/n Description

1 5067-5415 Door Assy
1 1 5021-1879 Permanent Magnet
2 1 Pressure Spring (not available)
3 2 5067-5412 Hinge for Infinity II Instrument Doors
1 G7167-68718 Light Protection Kit

(not shown)
Figure 83 Door assy

Electronic Box
Electronic Box

1 G4267-81006 Fan Axial E-Box
2 0950-5406 Power Supply 350 W
3 G7167-65850 Autosampler Specific Board
4 G4200-65880 Fusion Board
2110-1004 Fuse 10 A, 250 V

(not shown)
2110-1519 Fuse 3.50 A, 125 V

(not shown)
0380-3056 Plastic Spacer

(not shown)
Repair strategy for previous mainboard PN:G4267-65810 (G7167B Std S/N

NOTE DEBAQ00167//G7167B Multiwash S/N DEBAS00138)):
It might be necessary to replace the previous specific mainboard
PN:G4267-65810) with the current specific mainboard PN:G7167-65850.
Additionally you have to replace the Multisampler Hotel Rear Board
(G4267-65821) and the Cable Mainboard Hotel (5188-8046).

Electronic Box
Figure 84 Electronic box

Power Switch Assy
Power Switch Assy
p/n Description
5067-6140 Power Switch Assembly, Coated
5188-8035 Flat Cable for Power Switch

(not shown)
Figure 85 Power switch assy

Hydraulic Box (Standard)

1 5061-3356 Leak Sensor Assembly

(G7167B)
OR G4267-60043 Analytical Head, 100 µL
OR G4267-60046 Analytical head, 900 µL, 400 bar
4 G4267-60082 Needle Wash Assembly

including peristaltic pump
6 G4267-40831 Adapter Plate Needle Wash
7 G4267-68706 Sheet metal kit hydraulic
8 G4267-60041 Metering device assembly
9 G4267-65835 Board Hydraulic (Standard)
G4267-81005 Ribbon Cable Assy Hydraulic

not shown
G4267-65832 Hydraulic Adapter Board

not shown
10 G4267-68740 Foam Kit Hydraulics
11 3160-4097 Exhaust fan

not shown
G1313-87300 Waste tube injection valve assy (120 mm)

7 9
10
4, 5, 6
3 11
12
2
Figure 86 Hydraulic box (standard)

Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Standard)

2 5067-4263 2-position/6-port Injection Valve Bio-inert 600 bar
3 G5668-60043 Bio-Inert Analytical Head 100 µL

including peristaltic pump

not shown
5500-1256 Capillary Ti 0.17 mm x 100 mm SL/SL

not shown

7 9
10
4, 5, 6
3 11
12
2
Figure 87 Hydraulic box (standard)

Bio Hydraulic Box (1300 bar)


not shown

not shown

7 9
10
4, 5, 6
3 11
12
2
Figure 88 Bio Hydraulic box (multiwash)

Hydraulic Box (Multiwash)


(G7167B)
OR G4267-60043 Analytical Head, 100 µL
OR G4267-60046 Analytical head, 900 µL, 400 bar
4 G4267-60049 Flush head, 500 µL
5 5067-4204 Valve Block Pump Assembly
6 Sheet metal kit
8 G4267-65831 Board Hydraulic Box (Multiwash)

(not shown)

(not shown)
5067-5682 Tubing Kit

(not shown)
5188-8030 Tag Reader

(not shown)

(flushpump to injection valve)

6
9
5
4
10
3
11
2
Figure 89 Hydraulic box (multiwash)

Bio and Bio-Inert Hydraulic Box (Multiwash)


OR 5067-4263 2-position/6-port Injection Valve Bio-inert 600 bar
OR G7137-60043 Bio-compatible Head 100 µL
OR G5668-60043 Bio-Inert Analytical Head 100 µL
4 G5668-60049 Flush Head Bio 500 µL
6 Sheet metal kit
8 G4267-65831 Board Hydraulic Box (Multiwash)
(not shown)
(not shown)
5067-5682 Tubing Kit (not shown)
5188-8030 Tag Reader (not shown)
5500-1280 Capillary MP35N 0.17 mm x 250 mm SL-SL

6
9
5
4
10
3
11
2
Figure 90 Bio Hydraulic box (multiwash)

Hydraulic Box (Dual Needle)

1 5061-3356 Leak sensor assembly
2 5067-4260 2-position/8-port Injection Valve Dual Needle 1300 bar
3 G4267-60043 Analytical Head, 100 µL
4 5067-4256 3-position/6-port Peripheral Valve DN 1300 bar

(not shown)

8 9
10
7
11
5, 6
3 12
Figure 91 Hydraulic box (dual needle)

Valve Box Multiwash
Valve Box Multiwash
Item # p/n Description

1 1 5067-4229 Valve block
2 2 0905-1950 O-ring
(Two O-rings are necessary for the replacement)
3 1 5067-6576 Micro Pump
Figure 92 Valve box multiwash

Accessory Kit
Accessory Kit

G4267-68705 Accessory Kit
(for G7167B)

(for G7167A)
G5668-68705 Accessory Kit Bio-inert Multisampler

(for G5668A)

(for G7137A)
1 G4220-60007 Bottle Head Assembly

(not included in the accessory kit)
2 5063-6527 Tubing, Silicon Rubber, 1.2 m, ID/OD 6/9 mm
3 5500-1157 Capillary ST, 0.12 mm x 500 mm SL/S

(for G7167B)
OR 5500-1246 Capillary ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm SI/SI

(for G7167A)
OR 5500-1279 Capillary MP35N 0.12 mm x 500 mm SI/SI

(for G7137A)
OR G5667-81005 Capillary PK/ST 0.17 mm x 500 mm, RLO/RLO (Bio-inert)

(for G5668A)
4 5043-1013 Tubing Clip
5 5181-1519 CAN cable, Agilent module to module, 1 m
5067-5967 Tubing Clip Tube Connector
0100-1846 UNION-TEFZEL
5182-0716 Screw Cap Vial, 2 mL, amber glass, write-on spot, 100/Pack
5190-7024 Screw Cap, PTFE/silicone, 100/pk

Accessory Kit
2 4
5
3
Figure 93 Accessory kit (standard)
Tools

1 0100-1710 Mounting Tool for Tubing Connections
2 5023-2533 Mounting tool
Tubing Connector Leak Kit (5067-6137)
p/n Description
5067-6137 Tubing Connector Leak Kit
Figure 94 Tubing connector Leak Kit

Bottles
Bottles
p/n Description
9301-6524 Solvent bottle, clear, 1000 mL
9301-6528 Solvent bottle, clear, 1000 mL with cap
9301-6342 Solvent bottle, clear 2 L
9301-6341 Solvent bottle, amber 2 L

Tubing Kit Sampler Standard
p/n Description
G4267-60061 Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Standard
contains:
0890-1760 Tubing Flexible 1 ea / 1 meter
5042-6422 Tubing Connector, PP
0100-1708 Nut 1/8 PPS
0100-1700 FERRULE-AY-18IN
5500-1155 Tube Connector, 90 degree, ID 6.4
5042-9917 Flex Tubing
5043-1394 Ferrule
5043-1395 Nut
5043-1377 FEP Tubing OD 0.0625 in x ID 0.02 in
The components of the kit are not orderable separately.

NOTE
Accessories not included in the kit, orderable separately:

1 5042-9974 Tubing, PE, 1.5 m
2 0100-1846 UNION-TEFZEL
3 5067-5967 Tubing Clip Tube Connector

Figure 95 Tubing kit sampler standard

Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Multi-Wash
Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Multi-Wash

G4267-60081 Tubing-Kit-Sampler-Multi-Wash
Contains:
1 Flex-Tubing
2 Flex-Tubing with tube connector 90 °
3 FEP Tubing OD 0.0625 with Ferrule/Nut for washport
4 FEP Tubing OD 0.0625 with Ferrule/Nut for flushpump
4 1
Figure 96 Tubing kit sampler multi-wash

Multi Draw Kits
Multi Draw Kits
At the moment, multidraw is only possible with the Standard Multisampler.

NOTE

G7167-68711 Multidraw Kit for InfinityLab Sampler
Contains:
1 0100-0900 Union
2 G1313-87307 Seat Capillary, ST, 500 µL, ID 0.5 mm
3 G1313-87308 Seat Capillary, ST, 1500 µL, ID 0.94 mm
p/n Description
G4216-68711 Large Volume Injection Kit for 1290 Infinity II Samplers
Contains:
Extension Seat Capillary, 80 µL, 0.5 mm ID (0.9 mm OD)

Bio-Inert Multi-Draw Kit
Bio-Inert Multi-Draw Kit
Multidraw upgrade kit (Bio-inert) (G5667-68711) contains:
p/n Description
5067-4741 ZDV union (Bio-inert)
0101-1234 Sample loop 2 mL
0101-1236 Sample loop 500 µL

Upgrade Kits
Upgrade Kits
p/n Description
G4757A Multi-wash upgrade kit
G4758A G71767A Dual-needle upgrade kit
G4759A G71767B Dual-needle upgrade kit
For instructions on how to install the Upgrade Kits, please refer to the respective
NOTE Installation Notes:
• Agilent Infinity II Series Multi-wash Upgrade Kit Installation Note
(G7167-90210)
• Dual-Needle Infinity II Upgrade Kit Installation Note (G7167-90220)

Leak System Parts
Leak System Parts

G4267-68708 Drain management
contains:
1 G4267-40013 Leak Plane
2 Ref Vial Holder (not orderable as one part)
3 Wash Port Assembly (not orderable as one part)
5043-1357 Seal silicone rubber

(Washport; not shown)
G4267-60060 Blind seat

(not shown)
5042-9974 Tubing, PE, 1.5 m

(not shown)
Figure 97 Drain management kit

Sample Thermostat
Sample Thermostat
InfinityLab Sample Thermostat Upgrade Kit (G4761A) contains:
p/n Description
G7167-60101 Sample Thermostat
5067-6208 Condensate Drainage Kit

(not shown)
Figure 98 Sample Thermostat
The Sample Thermostat contains flammable refrigerant R600a. Please check

NOTE further details for installation.

Service Parts for Sample Cooler/Sample Thermostat
Service Parts for Sample Cooler/Sample

Thermostat

G7167-60101 Sample Thermostat
G7167-60005 Sample Cooler
1 G7167-81102 Digital Temperature Sensor, Evaporator
2 G4267-81008 Evaporator fan
3 G7167-60003 Compressor Cable Assembly

(for condensate detection)
G4267-81015 Power Cable for Cooler/Thermostat

(not shown)
G4267-81014 Data Cable for Cooler/Thermostat

(not shown)
G4267-05211 Sheet Metal Back Cover for Infinity II Samplers

(when no cooler/thermostat installed, not shown)
4
1
Figure 99 Replaceable parts in the Sample Thermostat

Cable Overview 463

Analog Cables 465
Remote Cables 467
CAN/LAN Cables 471
Agilent Module to PC 472
USB 473
This chapter provides information on cables used with the modules.

Cable Overview
Cable Overview
Never use cables other than the ones supplied by Agilent Technologies to ensure
NOTE proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC regulations.
Analog cables
p/n Description
35900-60750 Agilent 35900A A/D converter
01046-60105 Analog cable (BNC to general purpose, spade lugs)
Remote cables
p/n Description
5188-8029 ERI
to general purpose
5188-8044 Remote Cable ERI – ERI
5188-8045 Remote Cable APG – ERI
5188-8059 ERI-Extension-Cable 1.2 m
5061-3378 Remote Cable

to 35900 A/D converter
01046-60201 Agilent module to general purpose
5188-8057 Fraction Collection ERI remote Y-cable
CAN cables
p/n Description
5181-1516 CAN cable, Agilent module to module, 0.5 m
5181-1519 CAN cable, Agilent module to module, 1 m

Cable Overview
LAN cables
p/n Description
5023-0203 Cross-over network cable, shielded, 3 m (for point to point connection)
5023-0202 Twisted pair network cable, shielded, 7 m (for point to point connec-
tion)
RS-232 cables
(not for p/n Description
FUSION board)
RS232-61601 RS-232 cable, 2.5 m
Instrument to PC, 9-to-9 pin (female). This cable has special pin-out,
and is not compatible with connecting printers and plotters. It is also
called "Null Modem Cable" with full handshaking where the wiring is
made between pins 1-1, 2-3, 3-2, 4-6, 5-5, 6-4, 7-8, 8-7, 9-9.
5181-1561 RS-232 cable, 8 m
USB cables
p/n Description
5188-8050 USB A M-USB Mini B 3 m (PC-Module)
5188-8049 USB A F-USB Mini B M OTG (Module to Flash Drive)

Analog Cables
Analog Cables
One end of these cables provides a BNC connector to be connected to Agilent

modules. The other end depends on the instrument to which connection is being
made.
Agilent Module to 35900 A/D converters
p/n 35900-60750 35900 Pin Agilent Signal Name

module
1 Not connected
2 Shield Analog -
3 Center Analog +

Analog Cables
Agilent Module to BNC Connector
p/n 8120-1840 Pin BNC Pin Agilent Signal Name

module
Shield Shield Analog -
Center Center Analog +
Agilent Module to General Purpose
p/n 01046-60105 Pin Pin Agilent Signal Name

module
1 Not connected
2 Black Analog -
3 Red Analog +

Remote Cables
Remote Cables
ERI (Enhanced Remote Interface)

• 5188-8029 ERI to general purpose (D-Sub 15 pin male - open end)
• 5188-8044 ERI to ERI (D_Sub 15 pin male - male)
• 5188-8059 ERI-Extension-Cable 1.2 m (D-Sub15 pin male / female)
p/n 5188-8029 pin Color code Enhanced Classic Active (TTL)

Remote Remote
1 white IO1 START Low

REQUEST
2 brown IO2 STOP Low
3 green IO3 READY High
4 yellow IO4 POWER ON High
5 grey IO5 NOT USED
6 pink IO6 SHUT DOWN Low
7 blue IO7 START Low
8 red IO8 PREPARE Low
9 black 1wire DATA
10 violet DGND
11 grey-pink +5V ERI out
12 red-blue PGND
13 white-green PGND
14 brown-green +24V ERI out
15 white-yellow +24V ERI out
NC yellow-brown

Remote Cables
• 5188-8045 ERI to APG (Connector D_Subminiature 15 pin (ERI), Connector

D_Subminiature 9 pin (APG))
p/n 5188-8045 Pin (ERI) Signal Pin (APG) Active (TTL)
10 GND 1
1 Start Request 9 Low
2 Stop 8 Low
3 Ready 7 High
5 Power on 6 High
4 Future 5
6 Shut Down 4 Low
7 Start 3 Low
8 Prepare 2 Low
Ground Cable Shielding NC

Remote Cables
• 5188-8057 ERI to APG and RJ45 (Connector D_Subminiature 15 pin (ERI),

Connector D_Subminiature 9 pin (APG), Connector plug Cat5e (RJ45))
Table 39 5188-8057 ERI to APG and RJ45
p/n 5188-8057 Pin (ERI) Signal Pin (APG) Active (TTL) Pin (RJ45)
10 GND 1 5
1 Start 9 High
Request
2 Stop 8 High
3 Ready 7 High
4 Fraction Trig- 5 High 4

ger
5 Power on 6 High
6 Shut Down 4 High
7 Start 3 High
8 Prepare 2 High
Ground Cable Shield- NC

ing
One end of these cables provides a Agilent Technologies APG (Analytical

Products Group) remote connector to be connected to Agilent modules. The
other end depends on the instrument to be connected to.

Remote Cables
Agilent Module to Agilent 35900 A/D Converters
p/n 5061-3378 Pin 35900 A/D Pin Agilent Signal Name Active
module (TTL)
1 - White 1 - White Digital ground
2 - Brown 2 - Brown Prepare run Low
3 - Gray 3 - Gray Start Low
4 - Blue 4 - Blue Shut down Low
5 - Pink 5 - Pink Not connected
6 - Yellow 6 - Yellow Power on High
7 - Red 7 - Red Ready High
8 - Green 8 - Green Stop Low
9 - Black 9 - Black Start request Low
Agilent Module to General Purpose
p/n 01046-60201 Wire Color Pin Agilent Signal Name Active

module (TTL)
White 1 Digital ground
Brown 2 Prepare run Low
Gray 3 Start Low
Blue 4 Shut down Low
Pink 5 Not connected
Yellow 6 Power on High
Red 7 Ready High
Green 8 Stop Low
Black 9 Start request Low

CAN/LAN Cables
CAN/LAN Cables
Both ends of this cable provide a modular plug to be connected to

Agilent modules CAN or LAN connectors.
CAN Cables
p/n Description
5181-1516 CAN cable, Agilent module to module, 0.5 m
5181-1519 CAN cable, Agilent module to module, 1 m
LAN Cables
p/n Description
5023-0203 Cross-over network cable, shielded, 3 m (for point to point connection)
5023-0202 Twisted pair network cable, shielded, 7 m (for point to point connec-
tion)

Agilent Module to PC
Agilent Module to PC
p/n Description
RS232-61601 RS-232 cable, 2.5 m
Instrument to PC, 9-to-9 pin (female). This cable has special pin-out,
and is not compatible with connecting printers and plotters. It is also
called "Null Modem Cable" with full handshaking where the wiring is
made between pins 1-1, 2-3, 3-2, 4-6, 5-5, 6-4, 7-8, 8-7, 9-9.
5181-1561 RS-232 cable, 8 m

USB
USB
To connect a USB Flash Drive use a USB OTG cable with Mini-B plug and A
socket.
p/n Description
5188-8050 USB A M-USB Mini B 3 m (PC-Module)
5188-8049 USB A F-USB Mini B M OTG (Module to Flash Drive)

Firmware Description 475

Power Supply 478
Electrical Connections 480
Rear view of the module 481
Information on Instrument Serial Number 482
Interfaces 483
Overview Interfaces 485
ERI (Enhanced Remote Interface) 488
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 490
Main Board 491
General 491
Firmware 491
Troubleshooting 492
Leak Sensor 492
Fusion Board 493
Setting the 6-bit Configuration Switch 494
Instrument Layout 496
Early Maintenance Feedback 497
This chapter describes the module in more detail on hardware and electronics.

Firmware Description
The firmware of the instrument consists of two independent sections:

• a non-instrument specific section, called resident system
• an instrument specific section, called main system
Resident System
This resident section of the firmware is identical for all Agilent
1100/1200/1220/1260/1290 series modules. Its properties are:
• the complete communication capabilities (CAN, LAN, USB and RS- 232)
• memory management
• ability to update the firmware of the 'main system'
Main System
Its properties are:
• the complete communication capabilities (CAN, LAN, USB and RS- 232)
• memory management
• ability to update the firmware of the 'resident system'
In addition the main system comprises the instrument functions that are divided
into common functions like
• run synchronization through APG/ERI remote,
• error handling,
• diagnostic functions,
• or module specific functions like
• internal events such as lamp control, filter movements,
• raw data collection and conversion to absorbance.

Firmware Updates
Firmware updates can be done with the Agilent Lab Advisor software with files
on the hard disk (latest version should be used).
Required tools, firmware and documentation are available from the Agilent web:
http://www.agilent.com/en-us/firmwareDownload?whid=69761
The file naming conventions are:
PPPP_RVVV_XXX.dlb, where
• PPPP is the product number, for example, 1315B for the G1315B DAD,
• R the firmware revision, for example, A for G1315B or B for the G1315C DAD,
• VVV is the revision number, for example 650 is revision 6.50,
• XXX is the build number of the firmware.
For instructions on firmware updates refer to section Replacing Firmware in
chapter "Maintenance" or use the documentation provided with the Firmware
Update Tools.
Update of main system can be done in the resident system only. Update of the
NOTE resident system can be done in the main system only.
Main and resident firmware must be from the same set.
Main FW update
Resident System Main System
Resident FW Update
Figure 100 Firmware Update Mechanism

Some modules are limited in downgrading due to their mainboard version or

NOTE their initial firmware revision. For example, a G1315C DAD SL cannot be
downgraded below firmware revision B.01.02 or to a A.xx.xx.
Some modules can be re-branded (e.g. G1314C to G1314B) to allow operation in
specific control software environments. In this case, the feature set of the target
type is used and the feature set of the original one is lost. After re-branding (e.g.
from G1314B to G1314C), the original feature set is available again.
All this specific information is described in the documentation provided with the
firmware update tools.
The firmware update tools, firmware and documentation are available from the
Agilent web.
• http://www.agilent.com/en-us/firmwareDownload?whid=69761

Power Supply
Power Supply
The main power supply comprises a closed assembly and must not be
disassembled further for safety reasons. In case of a defect, the entire power
supply needs to be replaced.
The power supply provides 24 V DC used in the module. The line voltage can vary
in a range from 100 – 240 volts AC ± 10 % and needs no manual setting.
The output provided is +24 V/14.5 A.
MPS
Line voltage Primary circuits +24 V supply +24 V / 14.5 A
To disconnect the instrument from line, unplug the power cord. The power
NOTE supply still uses some power, even if the power switch on the front panel is
turned off.
No accessible hardware fuse is needed because the main power supply is safe
against any short circuits or overload conditions on the output lines. When
overload conditions occur, the power supply turns off all output voltages. Turning
the line power off and on again resets the power supply to normal operation if the
cause of the overload condition has been removed.
Over-temperature sensors in the main power supply are used to turn off output
voltages if the temperature exceeds the acceptable limit (for example, if the
cooling fan of the instrument fails). To reset the main power supply to normal
operating conditions, turn the instrument off, wait until it is approximately at
ambient temperature and turn the instrument on again.

Power Supply
Figure 101 Power supply connector
Table 40 Connector configuration

Connector Wire color
1↔1 red (+24 V)
2↔2 red (+24 V)
3↔3 red (+24 V)
4↔4 red (+24 V)
5↔5 black (GND)
6↔6 black (GND)
7↔7 black (GND)
8↔8 black (GND)

Electrical Connections
• The CAN bus is a serial bus with high-speed data transfer. The two
connectors for the CAN bus are used for internal module data transfer and
synchronization.
• The ERI/REMOTE connector may be used in combination with other analytical
instruments from Agilent Technologies if you want to use features such as
start, stop, common shutdown, prepare, and so on.
• With the appropriate software, the LAN connector may be used to control the
module from a computer through a LAN connection. This connector is
activated and can be configured with the configuration switch.
• With the appropriate software, the USB connector may be used to control the
module from a computer through a USB connection.
• The power input socket accepts a line voltage of 100 – 240 VAC ± 10 % with a
line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. Maximum power consumption varies by
module. There is no voltage selector on your module because the power
supply has wide-ranging capability. There are no externally accessible fuses
because automatic electronic fuses are implemented in the power supply.
NOTE proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC regulations.

Rear view of the module

Configuration switch
USB-Mini-Port
LAN
ERI
CAN
Power socket
Figure 102 Rear view of multisampler - electrical connections and label

Information on Instrument Serial Number

Serial Number Information 1200 Series and 1290 Infinity
The serial number information on the instrument labels provide the following
information:
CCYWWSSSSS Format
CC country of manufacturing
• DE = Germany
• JP = Japan
• CN = China
YWW year and week of last major manufacturing change, e.g. 820
could be week 20 of 1998 or 2008
SSSSS real serial number
Serial Number Information 1260/1290 Infinity

The serial number information on the instrument labels provide the following
information:
CCXZZ00000 Format
CC Country of manufacturing
• DE = Germany
• JP = Japan
• CN = China
X Alphabetic character A-Z (used by manufacturing)
ZZ Alpha-numeric code 0-9, A-Z, where each combination unambig-

uously denotes a module (there can be more than one code for
the same module)
00000 Serial number

Interfaces
Interfaces
The Agilent InfinityLab LC Series modules provide the following interfaces:

Table 41 Agilent InfinityLab LC Series Interfaces
Module CAN USB LAN RS-232 Analog APG (A) Special

(on-board) / ERI (E)
Pumps
G7104A/C 2 No Yes Yes 1 A
G7110B 2 Yes Yes No No E
G7111A/B, G5654A 2 Yes Yes No No E
G7120A, G7132A 2 No Yes Yes 1 A
G7161A/B 2 Yes Yes No No E
Samplers
G7129A/B/C 2 Yes Yes No No E
G7167A/B, G7137A, G5668A 2 Yes Yes No No E
G7157A 2 Yes Yes No No E
Detectors
G7114A/B 2 Yes Yes No 1 E
G7115A 2 Yes Yes No 1 E
G7117A/B/C 2 Yes Yes No 1 E
G7165A 2 Yes Yes No 1 E

Interfaces
Table 41 Agilent InfinityLab LC Series Interfaces
Module CAN USB LAN RS-232 Analog APG (A) Special

(on-board) / ERI (E)
Fraction Collectors
G7166A 2 No No No No No Requires a host module

with on-board LAN with
minimum FW B.06.40 or
C.06.40, or with addi-
tional G1369C LAN Card
G1364E/F, G5664B 2 Yes Yes No No E THERMOSTAT for

G1330B
Others
G7116A/B 2 No No No No No Requires a host module

with on-board LAN or
with additional G1369C
LAN Card.
G7122A No No No Yes No A
G7170B 2 No No No No No Requires a host module

with on-board LAN with
minimum FW B.06.40 or
C.06.40, or with addi-
tional G1369C LAN Card
The detector (DAD/MWD/FLD/VWD/RID) is the preferred access point for

NOTE control via LAN. The inter-module communication is done via CAN.
• CAN connectors as interface to other modules

• LAN connector as interface to the control software
• RS-232C as interface to a computer
• USB (Universal Series Bus) as interface to a computer
• REMOTE connector as interface to other Agilent products
• Analog output connector(s) for signal output

Interfaces
Overview Interfaces
CAN
The CAN is inter-module communication interface. It is a 2-wire serial bus
system supporting high speed data communication and real-time requirement.
LAN
The modules have either an interface slot for a LAN card (e.g. Agilent G1369B/C
LAN Interface) or they have an on-board LAN interface (e.g. detectors G1315C/D
DAD and G1365C/D MWD). This interface allows the control of the
module/system via a PC with the appropriate control software. Some modules
have neither on-board LAN nor an interface slot for a LAN card (e.g. G1170A
Valve Drive or G4227A Flexible Cube). These are hosted modules and require a
Host module with firmware B.06.40 or later or with additional G1369C LAN Card.
If an Agilent detector (DAD/MWD/FLD/VWD/RID) is in the system, the LAN

NOTE should be connected to the DAD/MWD/FLD/VWD/RID (due to higher data load).
If no Agilent detector is part of the system, the LAN interface should be installed
in the pump or autosampler.
USB
The USB interface replaces the RS-232 Serial interface in new FUSION generation
modules. For details on USB refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)” on page 490.
Analog Signal Output

The analog signal output can be distributed to a recording device. For details
refer to the description of the module’s mainboard.

Interfaces
Remote (ERI)
The ERI (Enhanced Remote Interface) connector may be used in combination
with other analytical instruments from Agilent Technologies if you want to use
features as common shut down, prepare, and so on.
It allows easy connection between single instruments or systems to ensure
coordinated analysis with simple coupling requirements.
The subminiature D connector is used. The module provides one remote
connector which is inputs/outputs (wired- or technique).
To provide maximum safety within a distributed analysis system, one line is
dedicated to SHUT DOWN the system’s critical parts in case any module detects
a serious problem. To detect whether all participating modules are switched on
or properly powered, one line is defined to summarize the POWER ON state of all
connected modules. Control of analysis is maintained by signal readiness READY
for next analysis, followed by START of run and optional STOP of run triggered on
the respective lines. In addition PREPARE and START REQUEST may be issued.
The signal levels are defined as:
• standard TTL levels (0 V is logic true, + 5.0 V is false),
• fan-out is 10,
• input load is 2.2 kOhm against + 5.0 V, and
• output are open collector type, inputs/outputs (wired- or technique).
All common TTL circuits operate with a 5 V power supply. A TTL signal is defined
NOTE as "low" or L when between 0 V and 0.8 V and "high" or H when between 2.0 V
and 5.0 V (with respect to the ground terminal).

Interfaces
Table 42 ERI signal distribution
Pin Signal Description
1 START REQUEST (L) Request to start injection cycle (for example, by start key on any
module). Receiver is the autosampler.
2 STOP (L) Request to reach system ready state as soon as possible (for
example, stop run, abort or finish and stop injection). Receiver is any
module performing run-time controlled activities.
3 READY (H) System is ready for next analysis. Receiver is any sequence con-
troller.
4 POWER ON (H) All modules connected to system are switched on. Receiver is
any module relying on operation of others.
5 Not used
6 SHUT DOWN (L) System has serious problem (for example, leak: stops pump).
Receiver is any module capable to reduce safety risk.
7 START (L) Request to start run / timetable. Receiver is any module perform-
ing run-time controlled activities.
8 PREPARE (L) Request to prepare for analysis (for example, calibration, detec-
tor lamp on). Receiver is any module performing pre-analysis activi-
ties.
Special Interfaces
There is no special interface for this module.

Interfaces
ERI (Enhanced Remote Interface)

ERI replaces the AGP Remote Interface that is used in the HP
1090/1040/1050/1100 HPLC systems and Agilent 1100/1200/1200 Infinity
HPLC modules. All new InfinityLab LC Series products using the FUSION core
electronics use ERI. This interface is already used in the Agilent Universal
Interface Box 2 (UIB2)
ERI Description
The ERI interface contains eight individual programmable input/output pins. In
addition, it provides 24 V power and 5 V power and a serial data line to detect and
recognize further add-ons that could be connected to this interface. This way the
interface can support various additional devices like sensors, triggers (in and out)
and small controllers, etc.
ERI
Figure 103 Location of the ERI interface (example shows a G7114A/B VWD)

Interfaces
Pin Enhanced Remote
1 IO 1 (START
REQUEST)
2 IO 2 (STOP)
3 IO 3 (READY)
4 IO 4 (POWER ON)
5 IO 5 (NOT USED)
6 IO 6 (SHUT DOWN)
7 IO 7 (START)
8 IO 8 (PREPARE)
9 1 wire DATA
10 DGND
11 +5 V ERI out
12 PGND
13 PGND
14 +24 V ERI out
15 +24 V ERI out
IO (Input/Output) Lines
• Eight generic bi-directional channels (input or output).
• Same as the APG Remote.
• Devices like valves, relays, ADCs, DACs, controllers can be
supported/controlled.
1-Wire Data (Future Use)

This serial line can be used to read out an EPROM or write into an EPROM of a
connected ERI-device. The firmware can detect the connected type of device
automatically and update information in the device (if required).

Interfaces
5V Distribution (Future Use)

• Available directly after turning on the hosting module (assures that the
firmware can detect certain basic functionality of the device).
• For digital circuits or similar.
• Provides 500 mA maximum.
• Short-circuit proof with automatic switch off (by firmware).
24V Distribution (Future Use)

• Available by firmware command (defined turn on/off).
• For devices that need higher power
• Class 0: 0.5 A maximum (12 W)
• Class depends on hosting module’s internal power overhead.
• If a connected device requires more power the firmware detects this
(overcurrent detection) and provides the information to the user interface.
• Fuse used for safety protection (on board).
• Short circuit will be detected through hardware.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)

USB (Universal Serial Bus) - replaces RS232, supports:
• a PC with control software (for example Agilent Lab Advisor)
• USB Flash Disk

Main Board
Main Board
General
The Infinity II mainboards provide the specific module electronics. These
electronics include the following:
• All connectors for specific module assemblies, for example power supply,
power switch, LEDs, fan, and so forth.
• Analog out (one per module – if available).
• Two adaptors for the FUSION core board (required for operation).
• The firmware is part of the FUSION core.
• Each module requires a specific main board due to different functionality.
• All main boards come without the Fusion board.
Firmware
The Fusion core uses B-firmware that allows the conversion of Infinity II to
1260/1290 equivalent module types (for example G7114A VWD to G1314F
VWD). This mode is the so called Emulation Mode.

Main Board
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting, the FUSION board can be taken out of another module and
added to the “problem” main board. It will boot and recognize if installed in
different module type and halt in “Resident” mode. After the installation of the
specific module firmware (main and resident) the module can be tested.
Possible Errors
The module specific “Error” documentation provides more information on error
numbers.
• Communication problems (LAN, CAN, USB) → FUSION board
• Boot problems
• RESIDENT → Firmware mismatch (main board requires later version as
installed in FUSION core or FUSION core has firmware from other module
type)
• No boot → FUSION board
• Specific module problems → main board
• Gray zone → main board
Leak Sensor
The module has a PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) for the leak detection
and an NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) for the ambient temperature
compensation. A leak would cool down the PTC and this change in resistance
would generate a leak signal. The NTC is located on the power switch assembly.
Solvent incompatibility
C AU T I O N
The solvent DMF (dimethylformamide) leads to corrosion of the leak sensor.
The material of the leak sensor, PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride), is incompatible
with DMF.
 Do not use DMF as mobile phase.
 Check the leak sensor regularly for corrosion.

Main Board
Fusion Board
• The FUSION board is not part of the main board.
• Can be replaced individually, see “Troubleshooting” on page 492 (from other
module or as individual part).
• During installation, both resident and main firmware (from the same firmware
set) should be installed.
• If the FUSION board was used with a different module, it will turn the module
into resident mode for correct main firmware update.

Setting the 6-bit Configuration Switch
The 6-bit configuration switch is located at the rear of the module with FUSION
electronics. Switch settings provide configuration parameters for LAN and
instrument specific initialization procedures.
All modules with FUSION electronics:
• Default is ALL switches DOWN (best settings).
• Default IP address for LAN 192.168.254.11
• For specific LAN modes switches 4-5 must be set as required.
• For boot resident/cold start modes switches 1+2 or 6 must be UP.
Configuration switch
Figure 104 Location of Configuration switch (example shows a G7114A/B VWD)

Table 43 6-bit Configuration Switch
Mode Function/Setting
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6
COM1 0 n.a.2 n.a. LAN Init Mode n.a.
Use Default IP Address3 0 0 0 0 0
Use Stored IP Address 0 0 0 1 0
Use DHCP to request IP Address4 0 0 1 0 0
Test 1 System n.a. n.a. n.a. ColdStart
Boot Main System / Keep Data 0 0 0 0 0
Boot Resident System / Keep Data 1 0 0 0 0
Boot Main System / Revert to

0 0 0 0 1
Default Data
Boot Resident System / Revert to

1 0 0 0 1
Default Data
1 When selecting mode COM, settings are stored to non-volatile memory. When selecting mode TEST, COM settings are taken from
non-volatile memory.
2 not assigned - Always keep these switches on position ‘0’ (off)
3 Default IP Address is 192.168.254.11
4 Host Name will be the MAC address.

Instrument Layout
Instrument Layout
The industrial design of the module incorporates several innovative features. It

uses Agilent’s E-PAC concept for the packaging of electronics and mechanical
assemblies. This concept is based upon the use of expanded polypropylene
(EPP) layers of foam plastic spacers in which the mechanical and electronic
boards components of the module are placed. This pack is then housed in a
metal inner cabinet which is enclosed by a plastic external cabinet. The
advantages of this packaging technology are:
• virtual elimination of fixing screws, bolts or ties, reducing the number of
components and increasing the speed of assembly/disassembly,
• the plastic layers have air channels molded into them so that cooling air can
be guided exactly to the required locations,
• the plastic layers help cushion the electronic and mechanical parts from
physical shock, and
• the metal inner cabinet shields the internal electronics from electromagnetic
interference and also helps to reduce or eliminate radio frequency emissions
from the instrument itself.

Early Maintenance Feedback
Early Maintenance Feedback
Maintenance requires the exchange of components that are subject to wear or

stress. Ideally, the frequency at which components are exchanged should be
based on the intensity of use of the module and the analytical conditions, and not
on a predefined time interval. The early maintenance feedback (EMF) feature
monitors the use of specific components in the instrument, and provides
feedback when the user-selectable limits have been exceeded. The visual
feedback in the user interface provides an indication that maintenance
procedures should be scheduled.
EMF Counters
EMF counters increment with use and can be assigned a maximum limit which
provides visual feedback in the user interface when the limit is exceeded. Some
counters can be reset to zero after the required maintenance procedure.
Using the EMF Counters

The user-settable EMF limits for the EMF Counters enable the early maintenance
feedback to be adapted to specific user requirements. The useful maintenance
cycle is dependent on the requirements for use. Therefore, the definition of the
maximum limits need to be determined based on the specific operating
conditions of the instrument.
Setting the EMF Limits

The setting of the EMF limits must be optimized over one or two maintenance
cycles. Initially the default EMF limits should be set. When instrument
performance indicates maintenance is necessary, take note of the values
displayed by the EMF counters. Enter these values (or values slightly less than the
displayed values) as EMF limits, and then reset the EMF counters to zero. The
next time the EMF counters exceed the new EMF limits, the EMF flag will be
displayed, providing a reminder that maintenance needs to be scheduled.

Setting up the module in a LAN environment 499
This chapter provides information on connecting the detector to the Agilent

ChemStation PC.

Setting up the module in a LAN environment
Setting up the module in a LAN environment
It is not recommended to connect a system via an autosampler. The detector is

producing the most data in the stack, followed by the pump, and it is therefore
highly recommended to use either of these modules for the LAN connection.

15 Appendix

Safety Standards 501
General 501
Before Applying Power 502
Ground the Instrument 502
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere 503
Do Not Remove the Instrument Cover 503
Do Not Modify the Instrument 503
In Case of Damage 503
Solvents 504
Symbols 505
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 507
Refrigerant 508
Radio Interference 511
Sound Emission Certification for Federal Republic of Germany 512
Installation of Stainless Steel Cladded PEEK Capillaries 514
First Step: Finger-tight Fitting 514
Second Step: Installation to Connector 515
Removing Capillaries 519
Agilent Technologies on Internet 520
This chapter provides addition information on safety, legal and web.

15 Appendix
General Safety Information

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of
operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these
precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety
standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument. Agilent
Technologies assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these
requirements.
Ensure the proper usage of the equipment.

WAR N IN G
The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
 The operator of this instrument is advised to use the equipment in a
manner as specified in this manual.
Safety Standards
This is a Safety Class I instrument (provided with terminal for protective earthing)
and has been manufactured and tested according to international safety
standards.
General
Do not use this product in any manner not specified by the manufacturer. The
protective features of this product may be impaired if it is used in a manner not
specified in the operation instructions.

15 Appendix
Before Applying Power

Wrong voltage range, frequency or cabling
WAR N IN G
Personal injury or damage to the instrument
 Verify that the voltage range and frequency of your power distribution
matches to the power specification of the individual instrument.
 Never use cables other than the ones supplied by Agilent Technologies
to ensure proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC
regulations.
 Make all connections to the unit before applying power.
Note the instrument's external markings described under “Symbols” on

NOTE page 505.
Ground the Instrument

Missing electrical ground
WAR N IN G
Electrical shock
 If your product is provided with a grounding type power plug, the
instrument chassis and cover must be connected to an electrical ground
to minimize shock hazard.
 The ground pin must be firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety
ground) terminal at the power outlet. Any interruption of the protective
(grounding) conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal
will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury.

15 Appendix
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere

Presence of flammable gases or fumes
WAR N IN G
Explosion hazard
 Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes.
Do Not Remove the Instrument Cover

Instrument covers removed
WAR N IN G
Electrical shock
 Do Not Remove the Instrument Cover
 Only Agilent authorized personnel are allowed to remove instrument
covers. Always disconnect the power cables and any external circuits
before removing the instrument cover.
Do Not Modify the Instrument

Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the
product. Return the product to an Agilent Sales and Service Office for service and
repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
In Case of Damage
Damage to the module
WAR N IN G
Personal injury (for example electrical shock, intoxication)
 Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be made
inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be
repaired by qualified service personnel.

15 Appendix
Solvents
WAR N IN G
risks.
 Do not use solvents with an auto-ignition temperature below 200 °C
(392 °F). Do not use solvents with a boiling point below 56 °C (133 °F).
 Avoid high vapor concentrations. Keep the solvent temperature at least
40 °C (72 °F) below the boiling point of the solvent used. This includes
the solvent temperature in the sample compartment. For the solvents
methanol and ethanol keep the solvent temperature at least 25 °C
(45 °F) below the boiling point.
 Do not use solvents of ignition Class IIC according IEC 60079-20-1 (for
example, carbon disulfide).
 Reduce the volume of substances to the minimum required for the
analysis.
 Never exceed the maximum permissible volume of solvents (8 L) in the
solvent cabinet. Do not use bottles that exceed the maximum
permissible volume as specified in the usage guideline for solvent
cabinet.
 Ground the waste container.
 Regularly check the filling level of the waste container. The residual free
volume in the waste container must be large enough to collect the waste
liquid.
 To achieve maximal safety, regularly check the tubing for correct
installation.
For details, see the usage guideline for the solvent cabinet. A printed copy of the
NOTE guideline has been shipped with the solvent cabinet, electronic copies are
available in the Agilent Information Center or via the Internet.

15 Appendix
Symbols
Table 44 Symbols
The apparatus is marked with this symbol when the user shall refer to the
instruction manual in order to protect risk of harm to the operator and to
protect the apparatus against damage.
Indicates dangerous voltages.
Indicates a protected ground terminal.
The apparatus is marked with this symbol when hot surfaces are available
and the user should not touch it when heated up.
Sample Cooler unit is designed as vapor-compression refrigeration system.

Contains fluorinated greenhouse gas (refrigerant) according to the Kyoto
protocol.
For specifications of refrigerant, charge capacity, carbon dioxide equivalent
(CDE), and global warming potential (GWP) see instrument label.
Flammable Material
For Sample Thermostat which uses flammable refrigerant consult Agilent
Information Center / User Manual before attempting to install or service this
equipment. All safety precautions must be followed.
Confirms that a manufactured product complies with all applicable Euro-

pean Community directives. The European Declaration of Conformity is
available at:
http://regulations.corporate.agilent.com/DoC/search.htm
Manufacturing date.
Power symbol indicates On/Off.

The apparatus is not completely disconnected from the mains supply when
the power switch is in the Off position
Pacemaker
Magnets could affect the functioning of pacemakers and implanted heart
defibrillators.
A pacemaker could switch into test mode and cause illness. A heart defibril-
lator may stop working. If you wear these devices keep at least 55 mm dis-
tance to magnets. Warn others who wear these devices from getting too
close to magnets.

15 Appendix
Table 44 Symbols
Magnetic field
Magnets produce a far-reaching, strong magnetic field. They could damage
TVs and laptops, computer hard drives, credit and ATM cards, data storage
media, mechanical watches, hearing aids and speakers. Keep magnets at
least 25 mm away from devices and objects that could be damaged by
strong magnetic fields.
Indicates a pinching or crushing hazard
Indicates a piercing or cutting hazard.
A WARNING
WAR N IN G
alerts you to situations that could cause physical injury or death.
 Do not proceed beyond a warning until you have fully understood and
met the indicated conditions.
A CAUTION
C AU T I O N
alerts you to situations that could cause loss of data, or damage of equipment.
 Do not proceed beyond a caution until you have fully understood and met
the indicated conditions.

15 Appendix
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Directive
This product complies with the European WEEE Directive marking requirements.
The affixed label indicates that you must not discard this electrical/electronic
product in domestic household waste.
Do not dispose of in domestic household waste

NOTE
To return unwanted products, contact your local Agilent office, or see
http://www.agilent.com for more information.

15 Appendix
Refrigerant
Refrigerant
The refrigerant HFC-134a is used only in the Agilent Infinity II Sample Cooler.
Table 45 Physical properties of refrigerant HFC-134a
Molecular weight 102
Critical temperature 101.1 °C
Critical pressure 40.6 bar
Boiling point -26.5 °C
Table 46 Physical properties of refrigerant R600a (isobutane)
Molecular weight 58.12
Critical temperature 134.98 °C
Critical pressure 36.6 bar
Boiling point -11.7 °C

15 Appendix
Refrigerant
Refrigerant
WAR N IN G
Refrigerant HFC-134a is known as a safe refrigerant, however accidents

can occur if it is handled incorrectly. For this reason, the following
instructions must be observed:
 Avoid contact with liquid refrigerant HFC-134a. At atmospheric pressure
HFC-134a evaporates at approximately -26 °C and causes frost bite.
 After skin contact, rinse the affected area with water.
 After eye contact, rinse the eye(s) with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes and consult a doctor.
 HFC-134a must not be allowed to escape in enclosed areas. Although
HFC-134a is not toxic, there is a danger of suffocation as gaseous
refrigerant is heavier than air.
 Please observe the following first aid instructions. After inhalation,
move the affected person to fresh air, keep him warm and allow him to
rest. If necessary, he should be supplied with oxygen. If he has stopped
breathing or is breathing erratically, he should be given artificial
respiration. In the case of cardiac arrest, carry out heart massage. Send
for a doctor immediately.
 Moreover, it must be noted that HFC-134a must always be extracted
from the system and collected. It must never be discharged into the
atmosphere on environmental grounds (greenhouse effect).

15 Appendix
Refrigerant

C AU T I O N
environment.
regulations.
more info.
Risk of fire or explosion

C AU T I O N
 Dispose of properly in accordance with federal or local regulations.
Flammable Refrigerant Used.
 Do not dispose of in domestic household waste.
 To return unwanted products, contact your local Agilent office, or see
http://www.agilent.com for more information.

15 Appendix
Radio Interference
Radio Interference
proper functionality and compliance with safety or EMC regulations.
Test and Measurement

If test and measurement equipment is operated with equipment unscreened
cables and/or used for measurements on open set-ups, the user has to assure
that under operating conditions the radio interference limits are still met within
the premises.

15 Appendix
Sound Emission Certification for Federal Republic of Germany
Sound Emission Certification for Federal

Republic of Germany
Sound pressure
Sound pressure Lp <70 db(A) accroding to DIN-EN 27779
Schalldruckpegel
Schalldruckpegel Lp <70 db(A) nach DIN-EN 27779

15 Appendix
Solvent Information
Solvent Information
Observe the following recommendations on the use of solvents.

• Brown glass ware can avoid growth of algae.
• Avoid the use of the following steel-corrosive solvents:
• solutions of alkali halides and their respective acids (for example, lithium
iodide, potassium chloride, and so on),
• high concentrations of inorganic acids like sulfuric acid and nitric acid,
especially at higher temperatures (if your chromatography method allows,
replace by phosphoric acid or phosphate buffer which are less corrosive
against stainless steel),
• halogenated solvents or mixtures which form radicals and/or acids, for
example:
2CHCl3 + O2→ 2COCl2 + 2HCl
This reaction, in which stainless steel probably acts as a catalyst, occurs
quickly with dried chloroform if the drying process removes the stabilizing
alcohol,
• chromatographic grade ethers, which can contain peroxides (for example,
THF, dioxane, diisopropyl ether) should be filtered through dry aluminium
oxide which adsorbs the peroxides,
• solvents containing strong complexing agents (e.g. EDTA),
• mixtures of carbon tetrachloride with 2-propanol or THF.
• Avoid the use of dimethyl formamide (DMF). Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF),
which is used in leak sensors, is not resistant to DMF.

15 Appendix
Installation of Stainless Steel Cladded PEEK Capillaries
Installation of Stainless Steel Cladded PEEK

Capillaries
This installation procedure applies for capillaries and corresponding fittings used
NOTE in modules delivered before January 2013.
The 1260 Infinity Bio-inert LC system uses PEEK capillaries that are cladded with
stainless steel. These capillaries combine the high pressure stability of steel with
the inertness of PEEK. They are used in the high pressure flow path after sample
introduction (loop/needle seat capillary) through the thermostatted column
compartment/heat exchangers to the column. Such capillaries need to be
installed carefully in order to keep them tight without damaging them by
over-tightening.
The installation consists of two steps. In the first step, the fitting is installed
finger-tight without using tools. Finger-tight means that the fitting will grip and
hold the capillary. This brings the fitting to the appropriate start position (marked
as 0 ° below) for the second step.
First Step: Finger-tight Fitting

1 Tighten the fitting using your fingers.

15 Appendix
Second Step: Installation to Connector

In the second step (“Second Step: Installation to Hard Connectors” on page 515
or “Second Step: Installation to Soft Connectors” on page 516), a wrench is used
to rotate the fitting relative to the finger-tight position by a defined angle. For
each of the cases mentioned above, there is a recommended range in which the
fitting is tight.
Staying below this range could create a leak, either a visible one or a micro-leak,
potentially biasing measurement results. Exceeding the recommended range
could damage the capillary.
Alternatively, a torque wrench may be used. The target torque for all connections
is about 0.7 Nm. When using a torque wrench, read instructions for that tool
carefully, as wrong handling may easily miss the correct torque.
Second Step: Installation to Hard Connectors

Use this procedure for hard connectors made from metal (titanium) or ceramics.
In the system, these are connections to and from the analytical head of the
autosampler (connections to injection valve and needle), and to a metal column.
First installation of a capillary to a hard connector

1 When tightening a fitting for the first time, start from the finger-tight position
(which is not necessarily a vertical wrench position) and rotate the wrench by
135 – 180 °. Staying below 135 ° (grey arrow) will be insufficiently tight, more
than 180 ° (red arrow) could damage the capillary.
possibly
leaky
recommended
range

15 Appendix
Second and subsequent installations of a capillary to a hard connector

1 When tightening the fitting for the second and subsequent times, again start
from the finger-tight position (which is not necessarily a vertical wrench
position) and rotate the wrench by 90 – 135 °. Staying below 90 ° (grey arrow)
could be insufficiently tight, more than 135 ° (red arrow) could damage the
capillary.
possibly
leaky
recommended
range
Second Step: Installation to Soft Connectors

Use this procedure for soft connectors, which are typically made from PEEK.
These are the following connections:
• to and from all bio-inert valves (injection valve in the autosampler and valves
in the thermostatted column compartment and 1290 Infinity Valve Drive),
• bio-inert ZDV unions (detector flow cells, multi-draw upgrade kit, capillary to
capillary connections, for example, for heat exchangers),
• to the autosampler needle and
• to PEEK columns (like many bio-inert columns).
For the installation of bio-inert ZDV unions, refert to the Technical Note
"Installation of stainless steel cladded PEEK capillaries" (p/n G5611-90120).

15 Appendix
First installation of a capillary to a soft connector

1 When tightening a fitting for the first time, start from the finger-tight position
(which does not necessarily need to be a vertical wrench position) and rotate
the wrench by 180 – 210 °. Staying below 180 ° (grey arrow) will not be
sufficiently tight, more than 210 ° (red arrow) could damage the capillary.
possibly
leaky
recommended
range
Second and subsequent installations of a capillary to a soft connector

1 When tightening the fitting for the second and subsequent times, again start
from the finger-tight position (which is not necessarily a vertical wrench
position) and rotate the wrench by 135 – 180 °. Staying below 135 ° (grey
arrow) could be insufficiently tight enough, more than 180 ° (red arrow) could
damage the capillary.
possibly
leaky
recommended
range

15 Appendix
Summary for Second Step

Table 47 Summary for second step
2ndStep First installation Subsequent installations
Hard connectors
possibly
possibly leaky
leaky
recommended
range
recommended
range
Soft connectors
possibly
leaky possibly
leaky
recommended recommended
range range

15 Appendix
Removing Capillaries
Potential damage of capillaries
C AU T I O N
 Do not remove fittings from used capillaries.
To keep the flow path free of stainless steel, the front end of the capillary is made
of PEEK. Under high pressure, or when in contact with some solvents, PEEK can
expand to the shape of the connector where the capillary is installed. If the
capillary is removed, this may become visible as a small step. In such cases, do
not try to pull the fitting from the capillary, as this can destroy the front part of the
capillary. Instead, carefully pull it to the rear. During installation of the capillary,
the fitting will end up in the correct position.
Rear Front
Step
Figure 105 Capillary fitting

15 Appendix
Agilent Technologies on Internet
Agilent Technologies on Internet
For the latest information on products and services visit our worldwide web site
on the Internet at:
http://www.agilent.com

In This Book
This manual contains technical reference

information about the Agilent 1290 Infinity II
Multisampler (G7167B), Agilent 1260 Infinity
II Multisampler (G7167A), Agilent 1290
Infinity II Bio Multisampler (G7137A), and
Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-Inert Multisampler
(G5668A).
The manual describes the following:
• Introduction,
• Site requirements and specifications,
• Using the module,
• Preparing the module,
• Optimizing performance,
• Troubleshooting and diagnostics,
• Error information,
• Test functions,
• Maintenance and Repair,
• Parts,
• Hardware information,
• LAN configuration,
• Safety and related information.
www.agilent.com
Agilent Technologies Inc. 2015-2020
Published in Germany
11/2020
Document No: SD-29000237 Rev. D

G7167 G5668 G7137 Multisampler SerMa en SD 29000237

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G7167 G5668 G7137 Multisampler SerMa en SD 29000237

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G7167 G5668 G7137 Multisampler SerMa en SD 29000237

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multisamplers

Agilent InfinityLab LC Series

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual

Restricted Rights Legend

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual

This manual covers the following InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers:

2 Site Requirements and Specifications

4 Using the Module

5 Preparing the Module

7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 3

9 Test Functions and Calibration

10 Maintenance and Repair

11 Parts for Maintenance and Upgrade or Options

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 4

2 Site Requirements and Specifications 41

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 5

5 Preparing the Module 124

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 6

7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 184

8 Error Information 187

9 Test Functions and Calibration 224

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 7

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 8

11 Parts for Maintenance and Upgrade or Options 399

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 9

12 Identifying Cables 462

13 Hardware Information 474

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 10

14 LAN Configuration 498

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 11

Product Description (G7167B) 13

This chapter gives an introduction to the Multisampler.

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 12

Product Description (G7167B)

Figure 1 Overview of the Multisampler

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 13

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 14

Product Description (G7167A)

Figure 2 Overview of the Multisampler

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 15

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 16

Product Description (G5668A)

Agilent 1260 Infinity II Bio-Inert Multisampler features a 100 % metal-free sample

Figure 3 Overview of the Bio-inert Multisampler

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 17

• Reliable analysis of biological samples – the metal-free sample flow path at

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 18

Product Description (G7137A)

Figure 4 Overview of the Multisampler

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 19

• Biocompatible sample flow path ensures integrity of biomolecules and

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 20

Overview of the Module

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 21

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 22

Standard Single Needle Setup

InfinityLab LC Series Multisamplers Service Manual 23

Injection Sequence for single needle